Home

Display - Service, Support

1. RESULT for CMD 0 Meaning Parameter Hex value range RESULT 1 0000 00011 Executed without error RESULT2 0000 0000 Default CMD Meaning 1 CN_STATUS connection status This command returns the status of the connection selected with the ID The CP is selected in the LADDR parameter If bit 15 reset ID is set this is automatically reset this action corresponds to the CN _CLEAR_RESET job see CMD 5 RESULT for CMD 1 Meaning Parameter Hex value range Bit valu e RESULT1 0000 000 Bits 0 3 Codes for the send direction excluded values 0x2 Bit O Connection Type 0 e No send and receive connection 1 e Connection reserved for send and receive jobs Bit 1 Status of current job No send job being executed Send job being executed Bits 2 3 00 01 10 Previous job e No information available on previous send job e Previous send job completed successfully e Previous send job not completed successfully A 214 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC10 AG_CNTRL Continued RESULT for CMD 1 Meaning Parameter Hex value range Bit valu e RESULT1 0000 00 0 Bits 4 7 Codes for the receive direction excluded values 0x2 Bit 4 Connection Type 0 e No send and receive connec
2. O O oO CO Communication error occurs temporarily and a repetition in the user program will often remedy the problem A 256 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs 7 9 Configuration limits Resources Required by the FCs and FBs Notice Please note the version information of the blocks Blocks with other versions have different resource requirements Table 7 15 Information for FCs FBs with an S7 400 NAME Version FC FB Load Work MC7 Local data no memory memory Bytes Bytes bytes bytes AG_SEND 1 1 FC5 732 576 540 20 AG_RECV 1 1 FC6 656 522 486 20 AG_LOCK 1 0 FC7 272 200 164 AG_UNLOCK 1 0 FC8 256 186 150 AG_LSEND 3 0 FC50 1044 846 810 52 AG_LRECV 3 0 FC60 1190 992 956 58 AG_SSEND 1 0 FC53 1642 1386 1350 118 AG_SRECV 1 0 FC63 1600 1356 1320 122 PN_InOut 1 3 FB88 2678 2234 2198 48 PN_InOut_Fast 1 0 FB90 2906 2266 2230 48 Table 7 16 Information for FCs FBs with an S7 300 NAME Version FC FB Load Work MC7 Local data no memory memory Bytes Bytes bytes bytes AG_SEND 4 2 FC5 1976 1664 1628 50 AG_RECV 4 7 FC6 1440 1206 1170 40 AG_LOCK 4 0 FC7 748 636 600 34 AG_UNLOCK 4 0 FC8 712 604 568 32 AG_CNTRL 1 0 FC10 1402 1138 1102 82 IP_ CONFIG 1 1 FB55 2478 2056 2020 62 PN_InOut 1 5 FB88 2470 2066 2030 54 PNIO_SEND 1 0 FC11 1272 1058 1022 42 PNIO_RECV 1 0 FC12 1122 928 892 42 P
3. Connection Overview with Multiple CPUs in an S7 Station If you operate more than one CPU in your S7 station you can click the button to extend the overview to the connections on all CPUs S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 147 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections 5 7 5 Free UDP Connection Program Controlled Addressing A free UDP connection allows program controlled addressing of the communication partner Communication between two nodes on Industrial Ethernet has the following properties e Data transfer is bi directional in other words it is possible to send and receive on the UDP connection at the same time e The local node is specified in the configuration The remote node is entered in the job header of the job buffer by the user program when it calls AG_SEND This allows any node on Ethernet LAN WAN to be reached e The IP address and the port of the sender can be read from the job header of AG_RECV SIMATIC S7 station with Ethernet CP User data area Job buffer send Job header receive User data ie unspecified UDP connection a Ethernet node unspecified gt receive lt send Figure 5 24 Sending and Receiving on an Unspecified UDP Connection with Programmed Addressing Amounts of Data Refer to the manual 2 supplied with the Ethernet CP for the number of UDP connections support
4. Slot Rules for SIMATIC S7 400 cc eee Permissible Slots dace bo ctirdace ee ak S26 boc heake Semewaanwuebede Number of SIMATIC NET CPS 0 0 cee ees VICMIGOMPULNG 4 sv uaa foe vi eee Yow Rede bonds gee vedere eee Removing Inserting Replacing Modules 0 08 Note on the S7 400 CPU Connection Resources S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 Contents A 15 A 16 A 17 A 17 A 20 A 22 A 23 A 25 A 26 A 27 A 31 A 34 A 35 A 37 A 38 A 39 A 40 A 43 A 45 A 46 A 46 A 47 A 48 A 48 A 48 A 48 A 49 A 49 A 50 A 50 A 50 A 50 A 51 A 51 Contents 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with STEP 7 NCM S7 0c0c cece eeeee A 52 3 1 How to Commission an Ethernet CP 00 00 cee eee A 53 3 2 General Information on STEP 7 NCM S7 000 eae A 54 3 3 Configuring Follow the Steps Below 00 cee eeeee A 55 3 3 1 Creating an Industrial Ethernet Subnet 0000 cee A 56 3 3 2 Entering an Ethernet CP in the Hardware Configuration A 59 3 3 3 Displaying the Network Attachments of a Station A 62 3 3 4 setting Further CP Properties 0 cece ees A 64 3 3 5 Substitute Objects in the STEP 7 Project 00000 A 74 3 3 6 Configuring Communication Services 0 0c cece eee ees A 77 3 4 Assign
5. ee Ethernet CP CP database User data buffer send connection Interaction of the CPU and Ethernet CP on Connections Amounts of Data A 86 Communication The Ethernet CP can transfer the amounts of data shown in the table below per job on one connection Table 4 1 ISO Transport ISO on TCP TCP UDP Sending 8192 bytes 8192 bytes 8192 bytes 2048 bytes Receiving 8192 bytes 8192 bytes 8192 bytes 2048 bytes S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 4 SEND RECEIVE Interface in the User Program 4 2 Programming the SEND RECEIVE Interface Principle of Job and Data Transfer The user program triggers the transfer of the user data areas with FC calls and monitors the transfer by evaluating the return codes of the FCs The following parameters are transferred when the FCs are called e The number of the connection ID e The location of the user data area in the CPU For detailed information about the call interface see Chapter 7 Purpose of the FCs Calling the function blocks has the following effects e The user data area is transferred to the Ethernet CP or received from the Ethernet CP e The execution of the job is confirmed positively or negatively in a status message Procedure Program the SEND RECEIVE interface in the user program as follows 1 Use the following functions FCs for dat
6. RANCH S7 Diagnostics Online Path Which module do you want to accesy Gateway Gateway attachment None Hode addiess gateway Sy subnetlD of destination A Destination Station Destination station attachment ooe MPI PROFIBUS AUTO SN mCP 443 1 Industrial Ethernet NCH S 7 Diagnose ONLINE bel S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 261 C79000 G8976 C182 08 8 NCM S7 Diagnostics Structure In the same way for example as the SIMATIC Manager NCM S7 Diagnostics appears as a separate two part application window with a menu and toolbar Sa Hilo ma CF Information Diagnostic Buffer Enlace 50 40 00 00 00 00 00 00 i Operating Mode Enlace 150 4 00 00 00 00 00 00 E E Connections Enlace ISO 00 00 00 00 00 00 aae 08 00 06 20 61 CC a Enlace 50 40 a Enlace 150 41 a Enlace ISO ais Ay Enlace 150 a ISO on TCP H E TCP a g UDP Navigation area with diagnostic objects Content area with the diagnostic result e Inthe navigation area on the left hand side you will find the hierarchically arranged diagnostic objects You have an overview of the available diagnostic functions at all times The object structure displayed in the navigation area is adapted to the type of CP you are currently checking and the functions and connections configured for the CP e Inthe content area on the right hand side you will see the result of the diagnosti
7. S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 41 C79000 G8976 C182 08 1 Communication via Ethernet CPs in S7 Stations Merging projects in the multiproject If you have used the multiproject functions allowing you to use connections to a partner in an unknown project STEP 7 will automatically attempt to synchronize two separately configured connections If you have configured projects with representative objects and want to merge these projects into a multiproject you have the following options e You can leave the representative objects with the configured connections unchanged e You can reassign the connection partner and then delete the representative objects S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 42 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 1 Communication via Ethernet CPs in S7 Stations 1 7 5 Network Project Variant Several Subnets in Several Sub Projects Configuration of the System If several network types need to be used and if these need to be managed in different projects due to the different tasks of the stations or due to the large span of the plant stations can be created as follows e Using sub projects in the multiproject e by configuring Other stations SIMATIC S5 in the other project Ethernet 1 Cell level Sub project 1 S7 400 1 h itl PROFIBUS CP i Wym Cell level sub
8. Depending on the PG PC interface used by the station on which you create your configuration you can download the defined configuration data to the S7 station over the TCP IP interface or over the ISO interface of STEP 7 When you download over the IP interface the CP must already have been assigned an IP address refer to Chapter 3 4 When you download over the ISO interface you can use the preset MAC address However please note the following Note If you want to download the configuration data over the ISO interface to a CP with an unchanged factory set MAC address and you have configured a different MAC address in your STEP 7 project you must start the download in NetPro or HW Config this is the only way you will be prompted to enter the current MAC address The SIMATIC Manager on the other hand aborts the download if the target station cannot be reached S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 Procedure E 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with To download the configuration data to the S7 station follow the steps outlined below 1 Open the Set PG PC Interface dialog box in the Windows Control Panel 2 Set the PG PC interface according to the CPs available on your PG and according to the bus attachment interface parameter assignment used For more detailed information refer to the integrated help system 3 Change the CPU to the STOP mode r
9. Figure 8 1 CP requiring diagnostics can be reached directly Rack slot 0 5 Node address MAC 08 00 06 01 02 03 Attachment of target station Industrial Ethernet Network 2 Figure 8 2 The CP requiring diagnostics is accessible indirectly over another CP S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 267 C79000 G8976 C182 08 8 NCM S7 Diagnostics 8 3 4 Using a Gateway Case a One gateway If the CP you want to check with diagnostic functions can only be reached via a gateway you must select the device and specify its node address in the local network You must also specify the S7 subnet ID of the destination network The subnet ID consists of two numbers separated by a dash One number for the project One number for the subnet You will find the subnet ID in the object properties of the subnet in the STEP 7 project The subnet ID is also printed out with the network configuration Node address gateway MAC 08 00 06 01 02 03 Rack slot 0 5 Node address PROFIBUS address 9 Attachment of gateway Industrial Ethernet pN Attachment of target station MPI PROFIBUS AUTO S7 subnet ID of target network 0001 0001 Figure 8 3 Example of the Parameter Settings for the Online Path with one Gateway S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 268 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 8 NCM S7 Diagnostics Case b Severa
10. Follow the steps outlined below 1 Select the project in the SIMATIC Manager 2 Select Insert gt Subnet gt Industrial Ethernet Result An object of the type network is created in the project This allows all the SIMATIC stations created in the project to be attached to this subnet lt 4 File Edit Insert PLC Yiew Options Window Help a x aeea Ess Led wal Pen 2 E p c Si MONNA a g SIMATIC 400 Station 1 E a SIMATIC 400 Station 2 SIMATIC SIMATIC SIMATIC H SIMATIC 400 Station 3 400 Station 1 400 Station 2 400 Station 3 lt Ei Ei MEN etz 1 Ethernet 1 SIMATIC S517 Fress F1 for help Figure 3 1 Project with Assigned Ethernet Network S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 56 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with 3 If you prefer a NetPro graphic network display select the network object Ethernet and confirm with Edit gt Open Object ie NETPRO Configuring Networks Network To Project D sitemens S TEP7 402 Examples EXIE RP Network Edit Insert PLC Yiew Options Window Help S e ol BLS Ethernet 1 ndustrial Ethernet MPI NMetz 1 iam a VIPI 3 SIMATIC 400 Station 1 SIMATIC 400 Station 2 SIMATIC 400 Station 3 SIMATIC S5 1 S CPU CP Eg CPU ICP rg CP IES 414 443 414 443 443 m o lo o lm o 2 2 2 Figure 3 2 Graphic Network Representation here showing stations not yet networked F
11. This sets the interval at which the diagnostic data is updated in a contents area when cyclic updating is selected e Maximum size of the diagnostic buffer log file This sets the maximum size of the file that is created with the menu command Diagnostic Buffer gt Save Cyclically specified in Kbytes Help gt You can obtain help about the current diagnostic function As an alternative you can also press the F1 key Remember that you can also call up context related help for some of the diagnostic functions To obtain help position the cursor on the output field and press the F1 key Note If the connection to the CP is terminated during the diagnostic session the following message is displayed The online connection was terminated You can reestablish the connection to the CP with the corresponding acknowledgment in the dialog The connection is then automatically reestablished whenever possible S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 264 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 8 NCM S7 Diagnostics 8 3 Starting Diagnostics 8 3 1 Establishing a Connection to the Ethernet CP Initial Situation Establish the physical connection between the PG and the SIMATIC S7 Station There are two ways of doing this MPI Industrial Ethernet ISO protocol Industrial Ethernet TCP IP IP protocol PROFIBUS Ways of Starting Diagnostics You can start NCM Diagnostics from the followin
12. e AG _RECV AG_LRECV AG SRECV The job is acknowledged with New Data Received when the data have been transferred to the user program Following this the FC call can be repeated Notice Remember that resource shortages can occur if the processing speeds on the sender and receiver are not the same sender faster than receiver The sender receives a message from the FCs if problems occur No resources on the destination station not with AG_SRECV S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 91 C79000 G8976 C182 08 4 SEND RECEIVE Interface in the User Program 4 4 4 4 1 Additional Information Programming Data Transfer on TCP Connections Purpose of TCP Connections TCP connections should be used above all for connections to systems of a different type if they do not support RFC1006 For communication between devices of the SIMATIC family you should use the more convenient ISO on TCP connections The following sections explain certain special points to note Special Features vi p S A 92 Block types FC calls Use only the following functions FCs for data transmission With the older S7 CPs for S7 300 you must use FCs AG_LSEND FC 50 and AG_LRECV FC 60 on TCP connections With the latest S7 CPs for S7 300 you also use FCs AG_SEND FC 5 and AG_RECV FC 6 for TCP connections Frame length On the TCP connections the protocol c
13. Start a network search for available modules by selecting the Browse button Select the CP with the matching MAC address from the components listed Assign the IP parameters taken from the networking to the CP by clicking the relevant button Result The CP is now accessible on Industrial Ethernet using the IP address Note You will find further detailed information on this procedure in the STEP 7 online help S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 81 C79000 G8976 C182 08 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with 3 5 Principle Downloading the Configuration Data to the Target System The configuration data of the Ethernet CP are downloaded from the hardware configuration All the configuration data of the S7 station are downloaded including the central configuration all relevant DP master systems and all parameter settings The data of the configured connections must also be downloaded see below Type of Interface A 82 You can download the configuration data to the S7 station on the following paths interfaces e MPI interface You can use this interface to download configuration data or when assigning a MAC IP address for the first time node initialization for details refer to the manual 2 Assigning Addresses for the First Time e Industrial Ethernet Here you use the PG mode of the Ethernet CP in the S7 station see also Section 1 3
14. continued e Case a Sequence with older CP types The send job is executed as soon as the parameter ACT 1 is passed Following this the parameter ACT 0 must be passed in at least one further call The status code in the output parameters DONE ERROR and STATUS is updated in each block call and can be evaluated To update the status code without starting a new send job start a new block call with the parameter ACT O Refer to the sample program at the end of Section 7 3 1 User program Ethernet CP Communications Partner CPU cycle Supply AG_SEND with data X ACT 1 Transfer ENE active over Ethernet Job completed without errdr Time Time Time Legend 1 Parameter transfer DONE ERROR STATUS S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 188 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC5 AG SEND FC50 AG _LSEND FC53 AG _SSEND continued f e Case b Sequence with newer CP types S7 300 only The send job is started as soon as the parameter ACT 1 is passed In contrast to case a the protocol used here to transfer the data segments each 240 bytes of user data requires the FC to be called again for each segment Depending on the length of the user data you must therefore continue to call the FC with ACT 0 until transfer of the entire data record is indicated at least one call with ACT 0 i
15. e Operation as PROFINET IO controller The block transfers the process data outputs of a specified output area to the CP to be forwarded to PROFINET IO devices and as status display returns the IO consumer status IOCS of the outputs of the PROFINET IO devices e Operation as PROFINET IO device The block reads the preprocessed process inputs of the CPU on the PROFINET IO device and transfers them to the PROFINET IO controller configured addresses the block also returns the IO Consumer Status IOCS of the PROFINET IO controller as a status display The preprocessed process data is available in a DB or bit memory area Call Interface Call interface in FBD representation PNIO_SEND CPLADDR DONE LEN ERROR STATUS locs CHECK_IOCS Example in STL representation STL Explanation call fe 11 PNIO_SEND block call CPLADDR W 16 0100 Module address from hardware configuration LEN 20 Length of the data area IOCS P DB10 DBX20 0 BYTE 3 Per send data byte one bit status in DB10 DONE M_70 0 Address for return parameter DONE ERROR M_70 1 Address for return parameter ERROR STATUS MW 72 Address for return parameter STATUS CHECK_IOCS M 70 2 Address for return parameter CHECK_IOCS SEND P DB10 DBX0 0 BYTE 20 Data area to be transferred from DB10 20 bytes Explanation of the Formal Parameters The following table explains all the formal parameters for FC11 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Co
16. oO oO O O O Ol O O O 8F304 Parameter is in the write protected 1st act data block S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 237 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC11 PNIO_ SEND continued Table 7 11 Condition Codes PNIO_SEND continued Meaning Parameter is in the write protected 2nd act data block Parameter contains a DB number that is too high Destination area is not loaded DB Timeout reading a parameter from the I O area _ 8F43H Timeout writing a parameter to the I O area m 8F44H Address of the parameter to be read is disabled in the accessed rack 0 8F45H Address of the parameter to be written is disabled in the accessed rack 0 Internal error e g illegal ANY reference 0 1 8090H Module with this address does not exist 0 1 80A0 Negative acknowledgment reading from the module 0 ee Negative acknowledgment writing to the module 0 80B0n The module does not recognize the data record 0 e The specified data record length is wrong or e The CP changes to STOP 0 80C0H The data record cannot be read 0 C oa The specified data record is currently being processed 0 There are too many jobs pending 0 80C3x Resources occupied memory 0 Communication error occurs temporarily and a repetition in the user program will often remedy the problem
17. tab ON the connection is established actively OFF the connection is established by the partner Use for FTP protocol Selecting the option has the following effects Modifiable e The TCP connection is now used as an FTP connection e Addresses tab The addresses are specified automatically Port 21 e Options tab The mode is set permanently to FTP e The Active connection establishment option is irrelevant and cannot be set Configuration limits see 2 Precondition The option can only be selected for an unspecified TCP connection ID This value must be entered as a block call parameter ID for Display only calling the FC in the user program to identify the connection The ID changes if the local ID is changed LADDR This value must be entered as a block call parameter ID for Display only calling the FC in the user program to identify the connection S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 128 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections Connection Name Reference Only in Multiproject If you create a connection to a partner in another project that has not yet been LE 9 merged with the current multiproject you must enter a connection name as 7 reference Interproject connections can then be joined up based on this reference As soon as the connections have been brought together the connection name reference can no longer be entere
18. 6 Programmed Communication Connections Parameter Field for an ISO on TCP Connection Identifier for the connection type Freely assignable connection reference must be specified in AG_SEND AG_RECV Range of values for the connection ID Table 6 7 Subfield Parameter ID Type Special Features Notes Use Please refer also to the general mandatory description in Table 6 10 Page A 171 optional 1 SUB _IP_V4 IP address of the partner m 11 SUB LOC _TSAP m 12 SUB REM_TSAP m 18 SUB CONNECT NAME O 19 SUB LOC MODE O 21 SUB_KBUS_ADR This value is always set to 2 for CPs for the m for S7 300 and does not need to be specified S7 400 22 SUB_CON_ESTABL m The general properties of the subfield types are described below in Section 6 6 Option using passive connection S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 167 C79000 G8976 C182 08 6 Programmed Communication Connections 6 5 4 Meaning Structure Parameter Field for an E Mail Connection To send E mails you must always set up one E mail connection per IT CP The E mail connection specifies the mail server over which all the E mails sent by the IT CP are delivered You will find a detailed description of how to use the E mail function with IT CPs in 5 ID connection ID No_of_ subfields n Subfield 1 Identifier for the connection type Freely assignab
19. 7 8 7 8 1 7 8 2 7 8 3 7 8 4 7 8 5 7 8 6 7 8 7 7 9 Specifying UDP Addresses 0 0 0 cece eee ees UDP with Broadcast and Multicast anaana ccc Checking the Properties of a UDP Connection Free UDP Connection 0 0 aana anane PETCH WRITE MOUE inc jade ndeetieenstoces ie stiaeadasmewee Se Routing to Distribute Load 0 0 eee OVENVICW eei ee hea concn dais oie ne ca es mes de Sse tek ane ew Bie ere ae Procedu e ed teed eee ele ee eee eee edhe a Seeds Configuration Data Block 0 0 ccc eens Parameter Field for System Data GCP NGIWOrkKiNg gt mairei cm 26k ss oe beens be 4 teen An E Parameter Fields for Connection Types 00 cee eee eees Parameter Field for TCP Connection 0 00 c eee eee eee Parameter Field fora UDP Connection 0000 eee eee Parameter Field for an ISO on TCP Connection Parameter Field for an E Mail Connection 000 ee Parameter field for FTP connection 0 ccc eee eee SUDAS YDES 2 tot ui ata esha tones octane ewaae eens eee Setting Parameters for FC Calls 0 ccc eee Parameters for CP and Connection Assignment input parameters Parameters for Specifying a CPU Data Area input parameters Status Information output parameters 0c eee eee FCs for the SEND RECEIVE Interface 0 0 0 cee FC5 AG_SEND FC50 AG
20. AG_SEND 240 bytes 240 bytes 240 bytes 240 bytes S7 400 AG_LRECV 8192 bytes 8192 bytes 8192 bytes 2048 bytes S7 400 AG_RECV S7 300 AG_RECV 240 bytes 240 bytes 240 bytes 240 bytes S7 400 AG_SSEND 1452 bytes 1452 bytes 1452 bytes 1452 bytes S7 400 AG_SRECV S7 400 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 183 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs Note For information on the length of the data area you can transfer with older versions of the Ethernet CPs refer to the product information bulletin manual of the Ethernet CP you are using 2 UDP connections Use without a job header On specified connections the address and job parameters are specified by the connection configuration The user program only provides the user data in the UDP data area when sending with AG_SEND AG _LSEND AG_SSEND or receives the data with AG_RECV AG_LRECV AG_ SRECV UDP connections Use with job header Free UDP connections require a job header in the user data area The following schematic illustrates the structure of the job buffer and the meaning and location of the parameters in the job header User data area Job buffer Port EBy low byte Bytes 0 1 eR IP address Bytes 2 3 H H Bytes 4 5 User data Bytes 6 7 e Bytes o Data byte 2040 Data byte 2041 2046 2047 Figure 7 1 Sending and
21. Alarm_S SFC17 19 are not supported in the multiplex mode S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 A 67 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with Time of day Synchronization Tab In this tab you can make the settings for one of the two synchronization modes explained below e SIMATIC mode If the CP receives MMS time of day frames its local time is synchronized providing the NTP mode was not configured MMS Manufacturing Message Specification The advantage of this mode is the accuracy that is generally higher than achieved with the NTP mode e NTP mode NTP Network Time Protocol In the NTP mode the CP sends time queries in the client mode at regular intervals to the NTP server in the subnet LAN Based on the replies from the server the most reliable and most accurate time is calculated and the time of day on the station is synchronized The advantage of this mode is that the time of day can be synchronized beyond the boundaries of the subnet Some CPUs allow the time to be requested automatically from an NTP server If you make use of this option on the CPU you should disable forwarding of the time to the station by the CP This prevents the time on the CPU obtained directly from the NTP server being overwritten by the time on the CP Forwarding over the CP could result in less accuracy Diagnostics Tab In the Diagnostics tab you can startNCM S
22. C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs 7 3 FCs for the SEND RECEIVE Interface Overview The following FCs are available for transferring data on the SEND RECEIVE interface FC Can be used with Meaning 7 300 S7 400 AG_SEND FC5 Xx xX for sending data AG_RECV FC6 xX xX for receiving data AG_LSEND FC50 xX for sending data AG_LRECV FC60 xX for receiving data AG_SSEND FC53 X for sending data AG_SRECV FC63 X for receiving data yI 4 S 1 Notes on the FCs for an S7 300 and S7 400 S7 300 With older versions of the Ethernet CPs the data length per job is restricted to lt 240 bytes applies up to block version V3 0 of AG_SEND AG_RECV With the latest versions of the Ethernet CPs only FCs AG_SEND and AG_RECV are used due to a new and more efficient internal protocol the data up to 8192 bytes can be transferred S7 400 With FCs AG_SEND AG_RECV the data length per job is restricted to lt 240 bytes Longer data records up to 8192 bytes can be transferred with FCs AG_LSEND or AG_LRECV The FCs AG_SSEND and AG_SRECV are for accelerated transfer of data by using optimized block communication between CPU and CP in the S7 station The fast communication has no effect on LAN communication These two blocks are supported as of STEP 7 V5 4 SP3 Please check the supported data area in the device specific Part B of this man
23. ID Type Special Features Notes Use Please refer also to the general mandatory description in Table 6 10 Page A 171 optional 1 SUB _IP_V4 Local IP address m 2 SUB NETMASK m 8 SUB DEF ROUTER m 4 SUB DNS _SERV_ADDR This subfield can occur from 0 to 4 times O The first entry is the primary DNS server 14 SUB _DHCP_ ENABLE 0 No DHCP O 1 DHCP 15 SUB_CLIENT_ID O The general properties of the subfield types are described below in Section 6 6 A 162 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 6 Programmed Communication Connections Example Address Name Type Initial Value Comment 0 0 STRUCT 0 0 DB_TYP WORD W 16 1 Identifier 2 0 FIELD_1 STRUCT Field 1 here system data field 0 0 Type INT 0 Type of data to be transferred 0 5 2 0 ID INT 0 Connection ID with system parameters 0 4 0 Subfield_Cnt INT 3 Number of subfields belonging to this field 6 0 Sub_field_1 STRUCT Subfield 1 SUB_IP_V4 0 0 Sub_field_ ID INT 1 Number of the subfield 2 0 Sub_field_len INT 8 Length of the subfield in bytes 4 0 STAT9 STRUCT 0 0 STAT10 BYTE B 16 C0 1 0 STAT11 BYTE B 16 6F 2 0 STAT12 BYTE B 16 DE 3 0 STAT13 BYTE B 16 6A 4 0 END_ STRUCT 8 0 END_ STRUCT 14 0 Sub_field_2 STRUCT Subfield 2 SUBNET_MASK 0 0 Sub_field_ID INT 2 Number of the subfield 2 0 Sub_field_len INT 8 Length of the subfield in bytes 4 0 Parame
24. Notice Preserving Consistency in Merged Subnets After merging the subnets you should check the consistency throughout the multiproject using the menu command Network gt Check Interproject Consistency in NetPro to make sure that there is consistency throughout the multiproject This check detects for example S7 subnet IDs that are not unique within the multiproject S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 58 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with 3 3 2 Entering an Ethernet CP in the Hardware Configuration Procedure By installing and assigning the Ethernet CP in the rack of a SIMATIC station you establish the logical attachment between the Internet CP and the subnet 1 Select the station in your project that you want to attach to Industrial Ethernet using an Ethernet CP 2 Select the CP in the hardware configuration just like any other module by selecting it in the hardware catalog and then selecting the slot in the rack You select CPs in the hardware catalog using a short text and the order number Once you have installed NCM S7 the CPs are available in the catalog Result The CP is assigned to the SIMATIC station For information about the permitted slots refer to 2 How to configure a module with STEP 7 is described in detail in 6 Subnet Attachment To allow you to activate the network attachment of the Ethernet CP the SIMATIC Manager displays the fo
25. R054 Interface Type Industrial Ethernet LP 4431 FS 2 Node Address 08 00 06 01 00 00 08 00 06 01 00 01 Subnet Ethemet 1 Cancel Help If you have configured a load distribution on two or more Ethernet CPs at the local or remote end you can assign the connection to the required route via the CP Parameter Description Via CP Local If more than one Ethernet CP exists in the station via which connections operated you can select route here The CPs are only displayed for selection if they are networked If no CP is assigned for example because the CP was deleted previously None is displayed here lf there is only one CP plugged into the station no selection is possible Via CP Depending on the local selection the possible remote CPs are displayed All the CPs Partner connected to the same subnet networked and the local CP can be selected remote Alternatives are only available when a connection is established to a remote station configured in the same project and the remote station has two or more CPs If there is no CP assigned on the partner for example because the CP was deleted previously None is displayed here If there is only one CP in the remote station no selection is possible lf the partner is an other station or SIMATIC S5 PLC one or more attachments are displayed for selection depending on the configuration and networking of the station S7 CPs for
26. Siemens AG SIMATIC NET Instructions Commissioning PC Stations Part of the manual package for NCM S7 for Industrial Ethernet the online documentation in STEP 7 Siemens AG S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 289 C79000 G8976 C182 08 C References and Literature 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 A 290 SIMATIC NET IT CP Instructions Part of the manual package NCM 7 for Industrial Ethernet the online documentation in STEP 7 option NCM S7 for Industrial Ethernet Siemens AG SIMATIC Configuring Hardware and Connections with STEP 7 Part of the STEP 7 documentation package STEP 7 Basic Knowledge Part of the online documentation of STEP 7 Siemens AG SIMATIC Programming with STEP 7 Part of the STEP 7 documentation package STEP 7 Basic Knowledge Part of the online documentation of STEP 7 Siemens AG SIMATIC STEP 7 reference manuals with manuals for LAD CSF STL System software for S7 300 400 System and Standard Functions Part of the online documentation in STEP 7 Siemens AG For installing and operating an Industrial Ethernet network SIMATIC NET manual Industrial Twisted Pair Networks Siemens AG Ethernet IEEE 802 3 ISO 8802 3 For installing and operating an Industrial Ethernet network SIMATIC NET manual for Triaxial Networks for Industrial Ethernet Lokale Netze Kommunikationsplattform der 90er Jahre Andreas Ze
27. The module does not recognize the data record The specified length in the LEN parameter is incorrect The communication bus connection between the CPU and CP is not established The data record cannot be read The specified data record is currently being processed 80C2n There are too many jobs pending 80C3H CPU resources memory occupied 80C4n Communication error occurs temporarily and a repetition in the user program will often remedy the problem 80D2uH Module start address incorrect S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 193 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs 7 3 2 FC6AG_RECV FC60 AG_LRECV FC63 AG_SRECV Meaning of the Block The AG_RECV AG_LRECV AG_SRECV function receives the data transferred on a configured connection from the Ethernet CP The data area specified for the receive data can be a memory bit area or a data block area Error free execution is indicated when the data could be received from the Ethernet CP Note Unless otherwise stated all the following information applies equally to the FCs AG_RECV AG_LRECV and AG_SRECV Call Call interface in FBD representation AG_RECV AG _LRECV AG SRECV NDR ERROR STATUS LEN Example in STL representation STL Explanation call fc 6 AG_RECV block call ID MW 40 Connection ID acc to configuration LADDR W 16 0100 LADDR 256 de
28. and SIMATIC Programmable Controllers SIMATIC S7 M7 C7 You can obtain these catalogs and any further information you require from your local SIEMENS office or national head office Some of the documents listed here are also on the Manual Collection CD supplied with every S7 CP S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 D Glossary D 1 General Section nananana naaa ee eee eee eee ene e eens A 293 D 2 Industrial Ethernet 0 0 0 00 cee eee ee ee eee eens A 298 D 3 PROFINET seare Sx etic ee Se ie ct Sa oe A 300 D 1 General Section Baud rate gt transmission rate Broadcast A broadcast is like calling all stations Using one broadcast frame you can reach all nodes that are prepared to accept broadcast frames Bus segment Part of a gt subnet Subnets can consist of bus segments and connectivity devices such as repeaters and bridges Segments are transparent for addressing Client A client is a device or in general terms an object that requests a service from a gt Server Configuration data Parameters that determine the modes and functions of a gt CP They are set and downloaded using the NCM S7 configuration tool CP Communications Processor Module for communications tasks CSMA CD CSMA CD Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection a transmission technique Frame A message from one PROF
29. e There is no connection configured and e there is no fixed IP address entered in the IP ACL and e and no dynamic IP address is currently being obtained As soon as an IP address is entered for example dynamically IP access protection is displayed as activated again S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 69 C79000 G8976 C182 08 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with IP Configuration Tab In this tab you can decide the route and the method with which the IP address of the local S7 station is obtained and assigned 2 1 With the options available here it is also possible to assign IP addresses dynamically outside the STEP 7 configuration Table 3 2 Options in the IP Configuration Tab Option e Set IP address in the Properties Ethernet Interface dialog Meaning Effect This option is the default It means that the IP address is set during the networking of the Ethernet CP The IP address of the CP is therefore fixed in the configuration You must select this option if you want to configure specified connections e Obtain an IP address from a DHCP server If you select this option the IP address is obtained from a DHCP server when the S7 station starts up The DHCP server is informed of the MAC address of the CP or the client ID that you can enter here Requirement Restriction If you select this option it is initially not possible to create a
30. the received alarms are acknowledged automatically The alarms are forwarded to the user program in the chronological order in which they were signaled Older alarms that have not yet been signaled to the user program and that become invalid due to more recent alarms are not deleted by the newer alarms Note As long as the block has not yet been called the alarms are acknowledged automatically in the CP If FB54 has been called at least once in the user program it must continue to be called to acknowledge pending alarms This is the situation when FC12 signals a value not equal to 0 in the ADD_ INFO parameter If FB54 is no longer called after it has been called once or more in the user program alarms are not acknowledged and there is no guarantee that the IO image will be updated correctly The can occur for example following a station return alarm The need to call FB54 can only be reset by restarting the CP power cycle Call Interface Call interface in FBD representation PNIO_ ALARM CPLADDR DONE ERROR f NEW STATUS A 252 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs Example in STL representation STL Explanation CALL FB 54 DB 54 PNIO_ALARM block call read write data record CPLADDR w 16 0110 Module address from hardware configuration DONE M 1 1 Address for return
31. 1 0 0000n Job completed without errors 0 O 81814 Job active Errors detected on the interface between CPU and CP 0 1 80A4H e Communication error on the K bus or e Data error Configuration by the user program is not set 0 1 80B1n The amount of data to be sent exceeds the upper limit permitted for this service upper limit 16 Kbytes 0 1 80C4H Communication error The error can occur temporarily it is usually best to repeat the job in the user program 0 1 80D2n Configuration error The module you are using does not support this service S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 223 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FB55 IP_CONFIG continued Table 7 9 Condition Codes for FB55 IP_CONFIG continued DONE ERROR STATUS Errors detected in the evaluation of the F 0 1 8183H 0 1 81841 0 1 81854 0 1 81864 0 1 8187H Meaning B in the CPU or on the interface between CPU and CP The CP rejects the requested data record number System error or illegal parameter type lt F 9 gt data type of the ANY pointer CONF_DB not OK Currently only the byte data type is accepted The value of the LEN parameter is larger than the CONF_DB less the reserved header 4 bytes or the length information is incorrect Illegal parameter detected The ANY pointer CONF_DB does not point to a data block Illegal status o
32. 2 PROFINET IO controller 3 PROFINET IO device or PROFINET IO controller 4 Server only S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 20 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 1 Communication via Ethernet CPs in S7 Stations Possibilities for Communication between Device Types The possible communication available with the types of communication listed above is shown in the following table S7 400 I Li a ii S7 300 Miil S7 communication SEND RECEIVE PROFINET CBA PROFINET IO S7 communication SEND RECEIVE PROFINET CBA PROFINET IO 1 PC only as client 2 S7 400 as PROFINET IO controller and S7 300 as PROFINET IO device or controller 400 7 1o m S7 communication SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE FETCH WRITE PROFINET CBA PROFINET IO 2 S7 communication SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE FETCH WRITE PROFINET CBA FTP services S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 95 115 to 155U H rl PG OP communication S7 communication SEND RECEIVE FETCH WRITE HTML process monitoring PROFINET CBA PROFINET IO FTP services PG OP communication S7 communication SEND RECEIVE FETCH WRITE PROFINET CBA PROFINET IO HTML process monitoring FTP services A 21 1 Communication via Ethernet CPs in S7 Stations 1 2 3 Operation Using a Configured or Programmed Database
33. 26 Diagnostic information RECV P DB11 DBX0 0 BYTE 7 Received data in DB11 7 bytes S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 239 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC 12 PNIO_RECV continued Explanation of the Formal Parameters The following table explains all the formal parameters for FC12 Parame Decla Possible Remarks ter ration Values CPLADDR WORD Module start address RECV ANY as The address of Specifies the address and length VARTYPE the data area Controller mode only points to one of BYTE is the alternatives permitted Memory bit area Data block area The length should match the total length of the distributed IO configured in HW Config whereby address gaps are also transmitted Device mode The data structure results from the order of the slots of the output modules configured for this PROFINET IO device on the PROFINET IO controller line and their length without address gaps Notes e The block begins to transfer the data at address 0 regardless of how you configured the addresses regardless of the lowest configured address Specifying an I O area is not permitted since you must first change the IOPS for GOOD before data can be accepted in the I O S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 240 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7
34. C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC10 AG_CNTRL Continued The reset ID bit 15 in RESULT 1 is set on the CP If there is a status query later it is therefore clearly recognizable whether the connection has been reset due to a reset job The reset ID is cleared on the CP only after this status query or as a result of an explicit CN CLEAR RESET command Notice The block must be called with ACT 1 if it is called with ACT 0 there is no function call and the block is exited again immediately since the job result of FC10 is obtained synchronous to the call it can be called again in the same cycle Explanation of the Formal Parameters The following table explains all the formal parameters for the AG_UNLOCK function Parame Declara Type Possible ter tion Values Meaning Remark ACT INPUT BOOL 0 1 The FC must be called with ACT 1 If it is called with ACT 0 there is no function call and the block is exited again immediately ID INPUT INT e Ay 258 1 The connection number of the connection is specified in the parameter ID The connection number can be found in the configuration n is the maximum number of connections and is dependent on the product S7 300 or S7 400 See also Configuration Section 5 3 1 If the call addresses all connections _ALL function with CMD 3 or 4 O must be specified as the ID LADDR INPUT WORD Modul
35. Commissioning A 154 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 6 1 6 Programmed Communication Connections Overview Area of Application Communication connections can be freely configured controlled by the program Interplay between Programming and Configuration Principle Connections are either configured using STEP 7 or configured by the user program while the S7 station is running Mixing these variants on a CP is not possible Configuration data for communication connections can be transferred to the CPU using the function block called in the user program Configuration data block FB55 CP_CONFIG System data for CP Configuration data transferred to the CP Connection n Nmax 64 The configuration DB can be loaded on the CP at any time The previously applicable connections and configuration data IP address subnet mask default router NTP time server and other parameters are overwritten The configuration DB can be loaded on the CP at any time The previously valid connections are then overwritten Based on the configuration data the Ethernet CP recognizes that the communication connections must be set up by the user program Notice As soon as the user program transfers the connection data via FB55 IP_CONFIG the CPU switches the CP briefly to STOP The CP accepts the system data in cluding IP address and the new connection data and processes it during startup RUN S7 CPs for Industrial Ether
36. Condition Codes The following table shows the condition codes formed by the DONE ERROR and STATUS parameters that must be evaluated by the user program Note For entries coded with 8Fxxy in STATUS refer to the information in the STEP 7 Standard and System Functions reference manual The chapter describing error evaluation with the RET VAL output parameter contains detailed information To find out which SFCs are used and are relevant for error evaluation display the properties dialog of the FC described here in the Calls tab Table 7 11 Condition Codes PNIO_ SEND DONE ERROR STATUS Meaning O e Data transfer active or e The CP is in STOP mode 1 0 0000H New data transferred without error 1 0 81834 e PROFINET IO configuration missing or e wrong CPLADDR or e The CP is in STOP mode Extra in device mode e The connection between PROFINET IO controller and PROFINET IO device is down or e PROFINET IO controller not reachable or e Total lengths configuration and LEN parameter are not consistent 81841 System error or illegal parameter type lt F 9 gt 1 8185n LEN parameter longer than SEND source area 8F22H Area length error reading a parameter e g DB too short 8F23H Area length error writing a parameter e g DB too short 8F24H Area error reading a parameter 8F254 Area error writing a parameter 8F 284 Alignment error reading a parameter 8F 294 Alignment error writing a parameter
37. ES A 280 A PINOUL 268248 com ates Se ae ete he ee Eee soe eee oeee Seo eee eee A 281 A 1 24AN DO GONNCCIOl i4 b2t ch batt bates ot Gene Gina ee teen oe 5 A 281 A 2 RJ 45 Jack for Twisted Pair Ethernet 0 000000 ceeeee A 281 A 3 Connector for Industrial Ethernet 000 cee eee eee A 282 A 4 Connector for PROFIBUS 0 0 c cece nes A 282 B Standards and Approvals for SIMATIC NET S7 CPs 0005 A 283 C References and Literature 0c cece eee A 289 D GIOSSANY aie ee hee ee na eis os oe eee Ne Ow eb eee be be tals A 293 D 1 General SCCUON 2 242224 222s ene nes Bieitseeded tateeee eed eeu A 293 D 2 Industrial Ethernet 22220 245 520050 cise ee ee eee eh ee hee A 298 D 3 PROFINET derrieira E eta tino ietne aie ata wee eee eae A 300 E Linking to Other Systems with FETCH WRITE 00cce eee ee eee A 302 F DOCUMENT HIStory icc dce wer naan cies deteeereeeeleees tee es A 306 WIG ON oaia et Sele aed ele ee eae eae Cees bw hehe bated wae oa esee A 310 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 14 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 1 Communication via Ethernet CPs in S7 Stations The Ethernet CP for SIMATIC S7 provides a series of communications services for different tasks This chapter explains the following wie The types of communication possible with the Ethernet CP on Industrial Ethernet The tasks handled by the Ethernet CP for the various ser
38. FC53 AG_SSEND continued Condition Codes The following table shows the condition codes formed by the DONE ERROR and STATUS parameters that must be evaluated by the user program Note For entries coded with 8Fxxy in STATUS refer to the information in the STEP 7 Standard and System Functions reference manual The chapter describing error evaluation with the RET VAL output parameter contains detailed information To find out which SFCs are used and are relevant for error evaluation display the properties dialog of the FC described here in the Calls tab Table 7 2 Condition Codes for AG_SEND AG_LSEND AG_SSEND Meaning Job completed without error No job being executed Job active This code is possible only with the S7 300 the FC was called with ACT 0 the job has not yet been processed No configuration or the ISO TCP service has not yet started on the Ethernet CP e llegal type specified for the SEND parameter e System error the source data area is incorrect LEN parameter longer than SEND source area ID parameter invalid e ID 1 2 16 S7 300 e ID 1 2 64 S7 400 0 1 8302H No receive resources on the destination station the receiving station cannot process received data quickly enough or has not prepared any receive resources 0 1 83044 The connection is not established The send job should only be attempted again after waiting for at
39. Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 153 C79000 G8976 C182 08 6 Programmed Communication Connections 6 Programmed Communication Connections In some situations it is an advantage to set up communication connections not over the configuration interface of STEP 7 but program controlled by a specific application Typical users who will find this useful are for example mass producers of machines who want to offer their customers a simple user interface but need to adapt the communication services to the operator input The end user should not need knowledge of STEP 7 As of STEP 7 V5 2 SP1 a function block is available for these applications that allows flexible transfer of data blocks with configuration data to an Ethernet CP You will find further information in the following sources e For the properties of the configurable connection types refer to Section 5 e For the properties of the configurable connection types E mail connection and FTP connection refer to 5 e After installing STEP 7 and the NCM S7 for Industrial Ethernet option you will find a programmed example in the Sample projects tab of the SIMATIC Manager This example is described in the appendix e You will find information on the numbers of connections and amounts of data in Section 4 1 Notice Please note the supported connection types of the used CP Type 2 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and
40. Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 221 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FB55 IP_CONFIG continued Explanation of the Formal Parameters Parameter The following table explains the formal parameters for the call interface of the IP_CONFIG function block Declara tion Possible Values Remarks ACT INPUT BOOL 0 1 When the FB is called with ACT 1 the DBxx is sent to the CP lf the FB is called with ACT 0 only the status codes DONE ERROR and STATUS are updated LADDR INPUT WORD Module start address When you configure the CP with STEP 7 hardware configuration the module start address is displayed in the configuration table Specify this address here CONF_DB INPUT ANY The parameter points to the start address of the configuration data area in a data block type byte LEN INPUT OUTPUT INT O 1 new data Length information in bytes for the configuration data area The parameter indicates whether the configuration data area was completely transferred Remember that it may be necessary to call the FB several times depending on the size of the configuration data area in several cycles until the DONE parameter is set to 1 to signal completion of the transfer For the meaning of this parameter in conjunction with the ERROR and STATUS parameters refer to t
41. Max CMax Count is the Modifiable number of attempted transmissions including the first 1 100 default 5 ount Inactivity Time The inactivity time specifies the interval after which the Modifiable connection is terminated if no sign of life is received from the partner 6 180 s default 30 s Window Time The window time specifies the interval at which sign of Display only life frames are sent For SIMATIC NET CPs the window time is set to 1 3 of the inactivity time 2 60 s default 10 s Sign of life frames are sent to check the connection when there is no data traffic Notice Window Time and Inactivity Time The partner responds to a sign of life frame with a frame They are therefore sent to the partner at the intervals of the window time To avoid unwanted connection termination the inactivity time should be at least three times as long as the window time S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 117 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections 5 4 4 Checking ISO Transport Connection Properties Overview Tab The Overview tab displays all previously configured ISO transport connections and their parameters for this station information only For an example of this display refer to Section 5 3 4 Parameter Local ID Description S7 Station This is the connection ID of the ISO transport connection PC Station Identification numb
42. RESULT2 0000 0000 Default S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 219 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs 7 6 FB55 IP_CONEFIG for Programmed Communication Connections Meaning of the Block Call Connections can be specified in a DB configuration DB and transferred to the CP with an FB You can use this variant of programmed communication connections as an alternative to connection configuration with STEP 7 With the function block FB55 a configuration data block CONF_DB is transferred to the CP The configuration data block contains all the connection data for an Ethernet CP Depending on the size of the configuration DB the data may be transferred to the CP in several segments This means that the FB must continue to be called until the FB signals complete transfer by setting the DONE bit to 1 Note Read the description of the configuration data block CONF_DB in Section 6 Call interface in FBD representation IP_CONFIG ACT DONE LADDR ERROR CONF_DB STATUS LEN EXT_STATUS Example in STL representation STL Explanation call fb 55 IP_CONFIG block call ACT M 10 0 Job initiated by memory bit LADDR W 16 0100 LADDR 256 dec in hardware configuration CONF_DB P db99 dbx10 0 byte 240 Data block with connection data LEN MW 14 Length info for the connection data DONE M 10 1 Execution code ERROR
43. S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 238 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs 7 8 2 FC12PNIO_RECV The PNIO_RECV FC is used to accept data in the PROFINET IO controller or PROFINET IO device CP modes e Operation as PROFINET IO controller The block accepts the process data from PROFINET IO devices inputs of the controller and transfers the IO provider status IOPS from the PROFINET IO devices to the specified input areas e Operation as PROFINET IO device The block receives the data transferred by the PROFINET IO controller configured O addresses as well as the IO Provider Status IOPS of the PROFINET IO controller and writes them to the data areas on the CPU of the PROFINET IO device reserved for the process outputs Call Interface Call interface in FBD representation PNIO_RECV RECV CPLADDR NDR LEN ERROR STATUS IOPS CHECK_IOPS ADD_INFO Example in STL representation STL Explanation call fc 12 PNIO_RECV block call CPLADDR W 16 0100 Module address from hardware configuration LEN 7 Length of the data area IOPS P DB11 DBX7 0 BYTE 1 Per receive data byte one status bit in DB11 NDR M 74 0 Address for return parameter NDR ERROR M 74 1 Address for return parameter ERROR STATUS MW7 6 Address for return parameter STATUS CHECK_IOPS M74 2 Address for return parameter CHECK_IOPS ADD_INFO MW
44. STATUS S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 196 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC6 AG_RECV FC60 AG_LRECV FC63 AG_SRECV continued f e Case b Sequence with newer CP types S7 300 only When the FC is called the user program prepares the buffer for the received data and instructs the CP to enter the received data there In contrast to case a the protocol used here to transfer the data to the receive buffer requires the FC to be called again for each data segment 240 bytes of user data Depending on the length of the user data you must therefore continue to call the FC until transfer of the entire data record is indicated by the parameter NDR The status code in the output parameters NDR ERROR and STATUS is updated in each block call and can be evaluated User program CPU cycle BD AG N lo data available yet 1 Data record A is entered segment by BD AG N segment in the buffer o data available yet 1 AG RECV OW COMMICTEO VWO Accept evaluate received data A BD AG N i 1 Data record B is No data available yet entered in the buffer AG_RECV Accept evaluate received data B AG RECV Data record C is entered segment by segment in the buffer Time Legend 1 Parameter transfer NDR ERROR STATUS S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Conf
45. You will find information on the current block versions and can download the blocks from the Internet at http support automation siemens com WW view en 8797900 If you require replacemenis please follow the instructions in the device specific Part B of this manual SIMATIC NET Quick Start CD Samples covering all aspects of communication HEMEN hae mpc fo de Flee ira r CECAT ELTEL The Quick Start CD that can be ordered separately is a treasure trove of sample programs and configurations Ed p a You can order this directly over the Internet at http support automation siemens com WW view en 21827955 Additional Information on SIMATIC S7 and STEP 7 The additional documentation on the basic software STEP 7 of the SIMATIC programmable controllers is included in electronic format in your STEP 7 installation You will also find information on SIMATIC programmable controllers on the Quick Start CD and from the Customer Support Online services at http www siemens en simatic net General information or http www ad siemens de csi net Product information and downloads S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 9 C79000 G8976 C182 08 This manual Symbols Used in this Manual Unless indicated otherwise the functions described in this manual assume the use 9 of STEP 7 This symbol is used to indicate functions that require a specific version 1 of STEP 7 or higher
46. address and local TSAP Transport Service Access Point e Remote addresses Remote IP address and remote TSAP Ethernet station A Ethernet station B Remote ie Local ISO on TCP CH Eea connection Semote TSAP a a SAP MAC IP address A address B V Figure 5 11 Sending and Receiving on One ISO on TCP Connection The address parameters are configured with NCM S7 and saved in the CP database Modifications and extensions to the Industrial Ethernet network topology do not therefore have any effect on the CPU user program Notice When you configure the Ethernet CP and the Ethernet destination station the TSAPs of an ISO on TCP connection must cross match Remote TSAP in Ethernet CP local TSAP in destination station Local TSAP in Ethernet CP remote TSAP in destination station S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 122 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections Addresses Tab The addresses tab displays proposed values for the relevant local and remote address information If necessary you can set the TSAP addresses individually Properties 150 on TCP Connection General Addresses Options Overview Status Information Local Partner IP dec 140 90 0 4 i 40 80 0 3 TSAP ASC ICP TCP 2 TSAP hex B54 43 50 20 31 54 43 50 2D 32 TSAF length F z Cancel Help Figure 5 12 Layout of
47. an FC is called with ACT 1 LEN bytes are sent from the ISO transport data area specified with the SEND parameter If an FC is called with ACT O the status codes DONE ERROR and STATUS are updated INPUT INT 1 2 64 S7 400 1 2 16 S7 300 The connection number of the connection is specified in the parameter ID See Configuration Section 5 3 1 LADDR INPUT WORD Module start address When you configure the CP with STEP 7 hardware configuration the module start address is displayed in the configuration table Specify this address here SEND INPUT ANY Specifies the address and length The address of the data area refers to one of the following Bit memory Data block area A 190 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 Parameter DONE 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC5 AG SEND FC50 AG _LSEND FC53 AG SSEND continued Declara tion OUTPUT Type BOOL Possible Values On ISO Transport and ISO on TCP TCP 1 2 to 8192 or up to length specified for SEND parameter On UDP 1 2 2048 or up to length specified for SEND parameter 0 Job active 1 done Remarks Number of bytes to be sent from the data area with this job The possible values range from 1 to length specified for the SEND parameter e Note t
48. areas on the SIMATIC S7 CPU from SIMATIC S5 SIMATIC PC stations or from devices of other ranges Depending on the CP type the following communications services are available for FETCH WRITE access ISO Transport optimized for top performance at the self contained manufacturing level TCP IP for internetwork communication with ISO on TCP connections RFC 1006 TCP connections PROFINET IO PROFINET is a standard of the PROFIBUS Users organization defining a heterogeneous communications and engineering model PROFINET IO Controller The S7 CPs that support the PROFINET IO controller mode allow direct access to IO devices over Industrial Ethernet PROFINET IO device S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 1 Communication via Ethernet CPs in S7 Stations With the S7 CPs that support the PROFINET IO device mode you can operate S7 stations as intelligent PROFINET IO devices on Industrial Ethernet For more detailed information on PROFINET CBA refer to 20 and 21 For PROFINET IO communication TCP connections are used to assign parameters and RT real time or IRT isochronous real time for cyclic IO data traffic PROFINET CBA PROFINET CBA An 7 station equipped with a CP capable of PROFINET CBA can be interconnected as a PROFINET CBA component in SIMATIC iMap For more detailed information on PROFINET CBA refer to 19 In PROFINET CBA
49. assigned Ind Ethernet station A station is identified by a gt MAC address in gt Industrial Ethernet ISO on TCP Transport layer connection layer 4 communication complying with ISO simulated on TCP On an ISO on TCP connection messages can be exchanged in both directions TCP provides the data flow communication without segmenting the data into messages ISO on the other hand is message oriented With ISO on TCP this mechanism is simulated on TCP This is described in RFC1006 Request For Comment ISO on TCP connections allow program event controlled communication via Ethernet from a SIMATIC S7 PLC to e SIMATIC S7 PLC with Ethernet CP e SIMATIC S5 PLC with Ethernet CP e PC PG with Ethernet CP e any system S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 298 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 D Glossary ISO Transport Connection Communication connection of the transport layer with the CP COM 143 previously S5S5 connection ISO transport connections allow program event controlled communication on Industrial Ethernet between SIMATIC S7 PLCs and e SIMATIC S7 PLC with Ethernet CP e SIMATIC S5 with an Ethernet CP e g CP 143 or CP 1430 e PC PG with Ethernet CP for example CP 1613 e Any system using the ISO transport protocol ISO 8073 The transfer of blocks of data on an ISO transport connection is bi directional MAC address Address to distinguish between different stations conne
50. automation siemens com WW view en 8776219 CP 443 1 EX20 http support automation siemens com WW view en 26417141 e CP 443 1 IT http support automation siemens com WW view en 8776322 e CP 448 1 Advanced EX40 http support automation siemens com WW view en79308871 e CP 448 1 Advanced EX41 http support automation siemens com WW view enZ3643789 e E PB Link http support automation siemens com WW view en7851748 e E PB Link PN IO http support automation siemens com WW view enl9299692 e WLAN PB Link PN IO http support automation siemens com WW view enZ1379908 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 7 C79000 G8976 C182 08 This manual Title Content Web Addresses NCM S7 for SIMATIC This is available on the Web at NET S7 CPs http support automation siemens com WW view en 1172503 Primer Information Technology This manual serves as instructions and as a reference for working with the CP in SIMATIC S7 with CPs functions of Internet technology for S7 300 and S7 400 This is available on the Web at manua http support automation siemens com WW view en 1172744 Commissioning PC The manual supports you and helps you to make efficient use of Stations communications with your PC applications in conjunction with the SIMATIC Manual and Quick Start NET modules It shows you how to configure PC modules and the steps require
51. byte from which from which from which no from the data are the data are the data are which the taken or taken or taken or data are written to written to written to taken or written to permitted range 0 2047 0 255 0 127 0 127 Length of the source dest data field in words Length of the Length ofthe Length of the source dest source dest source dest data field in data field in data field in bytes bytes bytes i ee 1 2048 1 256 1 128 128 permitted range S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 304 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 S7 Address Area ORG ID DBNR Start address permitted range Length permitted range E Linking to Other Systems with FETCH WRITE 054 064 07H Source dest Source dest Source dest data from to in data from to data from to I O modules counter cells timer cells With source data input modules with dest data output modules irrelevant irrelevant irrelevant I O byte no Number of the Number of the from which the data are taken or written to counter cell from which the data are taken timer cell from which the data are taken or or written to written to 0 127 0 255 0 255 digital I Os 128 255 analog I Os Length of the Length of the Length of the source dest source dest source dest data field in data field in data field in bytes wo
52. bytes Explanation of the Formal Parameters The following table explains all the formal parameters for FB52 Declara Possible Remarks tion Values CPLADDR INPUT WORD Module start address WRITE_ INPUT BOOL 0 Read data record Job type REC 1 Write data record The parameter must not be changed while the block is executing ID INPUT WORD Logical address of the PROFINET IO component module or submodule Bit 15 must be set for an output module Example of output address 5 ID DW 16 8005 For a mixed module the lower of the two addresses must be specified Index INPUT WORD See vendor information Data record number that the user for the data record wants to read or write numbers supported by the module DONE OUTPUT BOOL 0 This parameter indicates whether or 1 Data record not the job was completed without transferred errors successfully ERROR OUTPUT BOOL 0 Error code 1 Error S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 248 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 Declara tion 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs Possible Values Remarks STATUS OUTPUT WORD 0 No error Status code Other value Error see Table 7 13 LEN IN OUT INT The maximum length is e Read data record 480 bytes OUTPUT parameter only after a successful read the length of the read data record is indicated otherwise 0 e Write data r
53. can keep underlying connections established for example an ISDN telephone connection although no user data are actually being transmitted If this is not required set the interval so high that the underlying connection is closed down when no further user data are sent before a keepalive is sent Multiplex OP connections reserve internal CPU connection resources To attach TD OPs or HMI devices you can optimize the connection resources on the S7 300 CPU by having up to 16 of these devices communication on a single CPU connection resource multiplex mode If you do not use this option the number of operable TD OPs or HMI devices depends on the number of available connection resources of the CPU you are using As default this option is deactivated This means that a CPU connection resource is used for multiplex only when necessary Configured S7 connections over the CP use the same multiplex channel as you use for multiplexing the HMI connections If you configure S7 connections this means that one CPU connection resource is already used Please note PG connections do not use the multiplexer if you use a PG one connection resource is always occupied Note on Programming When you use the multiplex mode you must specify the rack slot assignment of the CP for addressing on TD OP HMI connections instead of the rack slot assignment of the CPU Applications for example ProAgent that require block related messages
54. e Reset module memory e Resetting to factory settings e Assigning an IP address using the target system selection in the SIMATIC Manager or the properties dialog in HW Config or NetPro If you subsequently upload the configuration data from the CPU to a PG you will always object the configuration data that were previously on the CP with parameters connections IP address 1 Note You should only use the assign IP address function during commissioning in other words before downloading the configuration data Ethernet profile for fault tolerant connections Select this profile if you use fault tolerant communication in your system Fault tolerant communication means that Industrial Ethernet is designed with redundancy and that you have configured fault tolerant S7 connections If you select the Ethernet profile for fault tolerant connections here the time response of the S7 connections is adapted As a result breakdowns of a connection are detected more quickly and the failover to redundant connections is faster Note Select the Ethernet profile for fault tolerant connections only when you actually use fault tolerant S7 connections Otherwise you must expect your system to be more susceptible to problems since for example the number of transfer or connection establishment attempts is reduced compared with non redundant systems Individual network settings Here you can make fixed network settings when
55. following table OUTPUT 0 Error code 1 error For the meaning of this parameter in conjunction with the DONE and STATUS parameters refer to the following table STATUS OUTPUT see following Status code table For the meaning of this parameter in conjunction with the NDR and ERROR parameters refer to the following table S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 198 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC6 AG_RECV FC60 AG_LRECV FC63 AG_SRECV continued Parameter Declara Possible Remarks tion Values OUTPUT On ISO Specifies the number of bytes accepted from Transport and the Ethernet CP and entered in the data area ISO on TCP e Note the block type 1 2 8192 _ 87 300 With older versions of FC AG_RECV up On UDP to V3 0 the data area is always 1 2 2048 restricted to a maximum of 240 bytes The current versions allow up to 8192 f bytes 2048 bytes for UDP 7 400 With FC AG_RECV the data area is restricted to a maximum of 240 bytes Condition Codes The following table shows the codes formed by the DONE ERROR and STATUS parameters that must be evaluated by the user program Note For entries coded with 8Fxxy in STATUS refer to the information in the STEP 7 Standard and System Functions reference manual The chapter describing error evaluation with the RET VAL o
56. for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 296 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 D Glossary Transport layer The transport layer is layer 4 of the ISO OSI reference model for open system interconnection The purpose of the transport layer is to transfer data reliably from device to device Transport connections can be used for the transmission Transport interface The transport interface of a SIMATIC S5 PLC is the access to the connection oriented services of the transport layer on the CP The transport interface presents itself to the control program in the form of handling blocks HDBs TSAP Transport Service Access Point Transmission rate According to DIN 44302 this is the number of binary decisions transmitted per time unit The unit is bps he set or selected transmission rate depends on various conditions for example the distance across the network Watchdog Mechanism for monitoring operability S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 297 C79000 G8976 C182 08 D Glossary D 2 Industrial Ethernet Base address Logical address of a module in S7 systems e For PROFIBUS The PROFIBUS base address is the address starting at which all addresses that are calculated automatically in the project are assigned e For Industrial Ethernet The base MAC address is the address starting at which all addresses that are calculated automatically in the project are
57. for example Version V5 2 This symbol appears in the margin to draw your attention to useful tips This symbol indicates recommended documentation Where you see this symbol you should also refer to additional information in the basic help system of STEP 7 This symbol indicates where detailed context sensitive help is available You can display these help texts with the F1 key or by clicking on the Help button in the relevant dialog Conventions References to other manuals and documentation are indicated by numbers in slashes These numbers refer to the titles of manuals listed in the References section of the Appendix S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 10 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 Contents Contents Part A 1 Communication via Ethernet CPs in S7 Stations 0 0c eee e aes 1 1 i i N w N 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 7 1 1 7 2 1 7 3 1 7 4 ee 1 7 6 madu stmialEthemiet cas cose gm ance Sieetes amp date este vies Mb ate eae ae nce Haus SIMATIC S7 Communication with S7 Ethernet CPs Types of Communication 0 0 0 ccc eens The Communication Services of Ethernet CPs Operation Using a Configured or Programmed Database PG OP Communication via Industrial Ethernet PG Communication with STEP 7 over Industrial Ethernet OP Operation Conn
58. for help re Figure 3 5 Project With Substitute Objects Configured Attaching Non S7 Stations to the Subnet The next step is to assign the substitute objects to the subnet as follows 1 Select the required object in the project and select Edit gt Object Properties 2 In the Properties dialog box that is displayed select the Interfaces tab and click the New button for example Other Station Result The New Interface Type Selection dialog box is displayed S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 75 C79000 G8976 C182 08 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with Properties Other station General Intertaces PROFIBUS interface FTF interface Delete OF Cancel Help Figure 3 6 Selecting the Subnet Type for Other Station Example 3 Select a subnet Result The Properties Ethernet Interface dialog is displayed Here you can select the subnet connect the station to the network and set the address MAC IP All the SIMATIC stations in the project can establish communication relationships to this substitute object The addresses MAP IP configured for the substitute object here must also be set on the station using the appropriate tool for example COM 1430 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 76 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with 3 3 6 Configuring Commun
59. form Based on this information the firmware loader can check the firmware for compatibility with the device For detailed information read the documentation for example the README file shipped with the load file This information is displayed even after reading in the FWL file into the firmware loader Working with the Firmware Loader Depending on the module type the downloading is prepared and executed in three or four steps For more detailed information refer to the next section and the dialog boxes themselves S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 279 C79000 G8976 C182 08 9 Firmware Loader 9 2 Loading Firmware Starting the Download Open the Windows Start menu and select the menu command SIMATIC gt STEP 7 gt NCM S7 gt Firmware Loader WA SIMATIC HET Firmware Loader The SiMATIC NET Firmware Loader ig used to load the firmware of SIMATIC WET CPs Mew firmware must be loaded when the functions of the firmware have been extended or when eros have been corrected To check whether you require an Update of pour firmware contact pour local SIEMENS office To load the firmware follow the steps az explained and the instructions in the readme file Cancel Help Select the Next button and follow the instructions displayed in the dialog box r Caution Make sure that the load file you are using is intended as an update for the version of the firmware
60. frame to a number of partners the connection option Multicast for UDP connections was introduced In contrast to the broadcast connection option it is also possible to receive frames sent to several nodes in the multicast group on this connection type By specifying a particular group of recipients multicast group load on recipients for which the message is not intended is prevented Multicast therefore represents a better solution than broadcast when frames are sent to groups of partner stations S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 141 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections Why Does an S7 CP Prevent Reception on Broadcast Connections A 142 It is often necessary for one station to send frames to a number of partner stations It is important that the frames are sent at the same time and arrive and practically the same time Sending and receiving broadcast frames is always required A broadcast message is received by all nodes in the network A typical application is the sending of broadcast frames to find a MAC address for an IP address ARP request For this reason a communications module must accept broadcast frames and evaluate them in its software The major disadvantage of this is that network performance sinks significantly if there are too many broadcast frames because each individual module needs to process all the broadcast frames to find out whether t
61. fully specified connection in the STEP 7 project because the local IP address is not known You must therefore select unspecified with passive connection establishment as the connection type Please not the following If the connections are configured over the interface in the user program you must use the option Set IP address in the user program as described below This also applied if the IP address is obtained from a DHCP server e Set IP address in the user program With this option you specify that the IP address is set over a user program interface function block IP_ CONFIG This allows the IP address to be supplied dynamically during operation In this situation communication connections are created only over the user program interface configuring connections using STEP 7 is not possible relates to connections over IP TCP ISO on TCP UDP This setting does not preclude the IP address being obtained from a DHCP server It is possible for the user program to instruct the module to obtain an IP address in this way Further information Read the section Programmed Communication Connections and refer to the example in the appendix of the manual e Set IP address using a different method With this option you specify that the IP address is set by other services outside STEP 7 In this situation configuring connections using STEP 7 is not possible relates to connections over IP TC
62. int 2002 Rem Port END_STRUCT END_TYPE TYPE CON_NAME_L 24 characters NetPro Max STRUCT id int 18 ID for CON Name len int 28 4 len n 0 x c ARRAY 1 24 of CHAR Vv B _ N a m e 7_ 7 2 4 C hh a 2 al gp Clg BiG ee pie Sg 2g OF 770 77 END STRUCT END TYPE TYPE SUB _KBUS_ADDR STRUCT id int 21 ID for KBUS address len int 5 addr BYTE B 16 04 RO S4 END STRUCT END_ TYPE TYPE ACT CN _ REQ STRUCT id int 22 ID for CON REQ mode len int 5 Subfield length w BYTE b 16 1 Active END STRUCT END_TYPE Note The structures listed here must also be entered in the symbol table Example of SUB _IP_V4 entry symbol Address Data type SUB _IP_V4 UDT 100 UDT 100 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 161 C79000 G8976 C182 08 6 Programmed Communication Connections 6 4 Meaning Structure Parameter Field for System Data CP Networking Below you can see the subfields that are relevant for networking the CP These must be specified in the parameter field for system data Some applications do not require all the subfield types refer to the table for details Type 0 Number of subfields n Subfield 1 Subfield 2 Subfield n Usable Subfields Table 6 4 Subfield Parameter
63. mode STOP Cause switch set to STOP What to do Change the switch to RUN on the Ethernet CP A 276 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 8 6 2 8 NCM S7 Diagnostics Communication Connections Checklist Table 8 6 Checklist for Typical Problems with ISO Transport SO on TCP UDP Connections Problem No data transfer on an ISO transport connection ISO on TCP connection or only in one direction Possible Cause AG SEND and AG RECV are not called in the user program Or Receive or send buffer too small or incorrect Identifying the Cause and Remedy Check the user program Evaluate status bytes in AG SEND and AG RECV What to do If necessary configure FC blocks If necessary correct ANY pointer The connection is not established Evaluate status bytes of the FC blocks or evaluate diagnostic buffer What to do Change the address parameters MAC IP address TSAP Data transfer too slow Receiving device too slow Evaluate diagnostic buffer Entry No receive resources on destination station XX What to do Delay the send trigger or check the destination station and optimize reception The complete data field is not sent on an ISO transport ISO on TCP UDP connection LEN parameter for AG SEND is set to the wrong value What to do Set the LEN parameter to the required size T
64. necessary As default Automatic Setting is selected and this setting generally guarantees problem free communication in most situations If problems occur in communication for example when connections are not established or when there are often disturbances on the network the reason may be that the selected or automatic network settings are not suitable You can then select a network setting to suit your network configuration A 66 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 Table 3 1 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with Settings in the Options Tab continued Option Send keepalives for connections Meaning Effect Here you can set the interval at which keepalives are sent to the partner of a communications connection This setting decides the latest time after which the failure of a communications partner is detected For all connection oriented services the Ethernet CP is configured so that keepalives are sent This guarantees that connections are closed if a communications partner fails and that the connection resources are released The setting made here applies to all TCP and ISO on TCP connections operated via the CP a connection oriented setting is not possible Possible values Default Setting 30 seconds Turn keepalives off 0 seconds Maximum value 65535 seconds Notes Recommendations Remember that the keepalive mechanism
65. over Ethernet without a node initialization S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 F Document History New in release 04 up to STEP 7 V5 1 SP2 C79000 G8976 C129 04 The FETCH WRITE mode is now supported on TCP connections See Chapter 5 The FETCH WRITE mode can be coordinated in the user program by the new FCs AG_LOCK and AG_UNLOCK See Chapter 7 NCM Diagnostics has a completely revised user interface See Chapter 8 The description of NCM S7 Diagnostics has been restructured While this manual provides you with an overview and checklists the online help provides you with detailed information on the diagnostic events This was new in release 02 STEP7 V5 3 SP2 C79000 G8900 C182 02 New blocks for user programs New FCs and FBs are available for PROFINET services Descriptions that were temporarily included in new releases of the specific device manuals are now included in this general part Range of devices described S7 CPs and gateways The devices described in detail in Part B now include not only the CPs for SIMATIC S7 but also the gateway IWLAN PB Link PN IO This step was taken in particular due to the special significance for PROFINET applications S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 309 C79000 G8976 C182 08 A Access coordination A 202 Address parameters Broadcast A 144 broad
66. parameter DONE ERROR M 1 2 Address for return parameter ERROR NEW M 1 3 TRUE A new alarm was received STATUS MW 12 Error code of the SFB or PNIO Ctrl ID MW 14 Logical base address of the component module or submodule from which an alarm was received LEN MW 16 Length of the received alarm information AINFO MODE MD 18 RESERVED value always 0 TINFO P DB4 DBX0 0 BYTE 32 task information Destination area for OB start information and management information fixed length 32 bytes of diagnostic AINFO P DB4 DBX32 0 BYTE 532 information alarm information Destination area for header information and additional alarm information Explanation of the Formal Parameters The following table explains all the formal parameters for FB54 Parame ter Declara tion Possible Remarks Values CPLADDR INPUT WORD Start address of the module that caused the problem DONE OUTPUT BOOL 0 This parameter indicates whether or 1 Alarm information not the job was completed without transferred errors successfully If DONE 1 the NEW parameter must also be checked ERROR OUTPUT BOOL 0 Error code 1 Error NEW OUTPUT BOOL 0 Data transfer active or If DONE 1 and NEW 1 anew no new alarm received alarm is signaled 1 New alarm received and acknowledged STATUS OUTPUT WORD 0 No error Status code Other value Error see Table 7 14 S7 CPs fo
67. product or part of the documentation that is of particular importance and that will be of benefit to the user S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 Trademarks SIMATIC SIMATIC HMI and SIMATIC NET are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG Third parties using for their own purposes any other names in this document which refer to trademarks might infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners Safety Instructions Regarding your Product Before you use the product described here read the safety instructions below thoroughly Qualified Personnel Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment Qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission to ground and to tag circuits equipment and systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards Correct Usage of Hardware Products Note the following Warning This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported stored set up and installed correctly and operated and maintained as recommended Before you use the supplied sample programs or programs you have written your
68. specified in the parameter ID See 1 2 64 for Configuration Section 5 3 1 S7 400 LADDR INPUT WORD Module start address When you configure the CP with STEP 7 hardware configuration the module start address is displayed in the configuration table Specify this address here STATUS OUTPUT WORD see following Status code table For meaning refer to the table below Condition Codes The following table shows the STATUS code that must be evaluated by the user program Table 7 5 AG UNLOCK Condition Codes STATUS Meaning 7000n CP is not processing a job 70014 FETCH active 7002h WRITE active 8183 FETCH WRITE nor configured for this connection S7 400 only 81864 ID number not in permitted range e g 1 64 with S7 400 Industrial Ethernet CPs 80A4H The communication bus connection between the CPU and CP is not established Only with newer CPU versions 80B0n The module does not recognize the data record 80B1n The specified length in the LEN parameter is incorrect 80B2H The communication bus connection between the CPU and CP is not established 80CO0n The data record cannot be read 80C1H The specified data record is currently being processed 80C2n There are too many jobs pending 80C3x CPU resources memory occupied 80C4H Communication error occurs temporarily and a repetition in the user program will often remedy the problem 80D2n Module start address incorrect S7 CPs for Ind
69. the Addresses Tab of the Properties Dialog with Default TSAPs for ISO on TCP Connections TSAP Format ISO on TCP connections have a TSAP length of 1 to 16 bytes When you are entering values the current length is displayed automatically visible display 16 ASCII characters Local and remote TSAPs can be input as hexadecimal values or as ASCII strings If you make your entries in ASCII the characters you enter are also displayed in hexadecimal format If you make your entries in hexadecimal printable characters are displayed in ASCII 8 hexadecimal values are visible If you enter nonprintable characters the ASCII display is gray no further ASCII entries possible and the nonprintable characters are displayed as periods Local and Remote TSAPs Remote and local TSAPs can be identical since the connection is uniquely identified by the different MAC addresses If you require more than one connection between two stations the TSAPs must also be different S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 123 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections Default TSAPs When configuring the local and remote TSAPs there is a default value TCP 1 for the first connection between the two partners can be changed For a new connection between the two partners the default value TCP 2 is proposed With a new connection to a new partner the value TCP 1 is used again Addre
70. the SIMATIC Manager select the station in your project that you want to check 2 Select the object properties using the menu command Edit gt Object Properties or by double clicking on the station symbol 3 Select the Interfaces tab Result Properties SIMATIC 400 Station E General Interfaces Settings Mod TES MPI 2 CPU 416 1 BES 416 1301 0460 Ind Ethernet 140 80 0 4 Ethernet 1 CP 443 1 1 BE 443 1 EX10 0KE0 Ind Ethernet 140 80 0 2 Ethernet 1 CP 443 1 BRE 443 1 Es 02 0sE0 MPI 2 CPU 416 1 1 BES 416 1301 0460 Ind Ethernet 08 00 06 0 Ethernet 1 CP 443 1 BGR EGEF 443 1 BHOU OHE Display interfaces by type W MPI IY PROFIBUS i Industrial Ethernet Cancel Help Figure 3 4 Interface Tab in the SIMATIC 300 400 Properties Dialog Box In the displayed dialog you can see the subnet attachments that were configured for the SIMATIC station S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 63 C79000 G8976 C182 08 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with 3 3 4 Overview Setting Further CP Properties In addition to the network attachment you can also make further settings for the specific module or you can call functions 1 Select the Ethernet CP in the hardware configuration 2 Select Edit gt Object Properties Depending on the type of CP you are using the dialog includes other tabs in addition to the General tab describe
71. the description of the Properties dialog of the CP in the integrated Addresses Tab The Addresses tab displays the address at which the module can be addressed by the user program You require this address when calling the FCs for transport connections gt see Chapter 7 Notice Please note the following notes on S7 300 stations If you selected the Update OB1 process image cyclically option in the CPU configuration default you must set the module base address of the Ethernet CP outside the process image base addresses in the Addresses tab Example If the size of the process image selected for the CPU is 1024 0 1023 the address for the Ethernet CP must be set equal to or higher than 1024 Options Tab Depending on the CP type you can make the following settings Table 3 1 Settings in the Options Tab Option e Time of day synchronization Meaning Effect Here you decide whether the CP passes on time of day frames or not You require this function if you have several CPs in a station since only one CP on the same network is permitted to forward the time synchronization messages Note The time of day synchronization function does not exist for all module types e Data transfer gt 240 bytes With this option you specify whether or not the CP will support jobs with a data length of more than 240 bytes for S7 300 stations Notes The transfer of more than 240 byt
72. the following functions via the CP using the ISO protocol and the factory set MAC address e Download the defined configuration to the CP or CPU e Run diagnostics on the CP or CPU Before you can download defined configuration data to the device using an IP address you must first assign an IP address to the CP Assigning the Address Options and Recommendations There are three ways of assigning this address in STEP 7 e Addressing by selecting the target system in the SIMATIC Manager This option allows you to assign the address without having to set up a STEP 7 project This is useful for example if you want to download defined configuration data you created offline to the S7 station This is described in Section 3 4 1 e Addressing using the properties dialog in HW Config or NetPro This option assumes that the CP was networked in STEP 7 The advantage of this method is that the IP parameters set during configuration in STEP 7 NetPro can be used In the Addressing tab you assign the previously configured IP address and IP parameters to the CP This is necessary before the configuration data can be downloaded to the CP over Ethernet This is described in Section 3 4 2 e Downloading configuration data using the ISO protocol A further variant is to download project engineering data with a defined IP address over the ISO protocol See above this applies to CPs that support the ISO protocol S7 CPs for Industrial Ethe
73. the status of the connection Status Information This tab displays the current status information for the connection valid at the time the dialog is opened This information corresponds to the NCM Diagnostics display and is only available when the station can be reached online S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections 5 4 1 Specifying the Local Connection Endpoint General Tab This tab of the Properties dialog displays general connection parameters that identify the local connection endpoint OERA I i n 0001 4020 Figure 5 5 Layout of the Properties Dialog for the General Tab ISO Transport Connections S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 111 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections Attributes Local Endpoint Via CP Active Connection Establishment Block Parameters LADDR Description Access The entry is identical to the Local ID parameter in the connection Selectable table When you create the connection a name is proposed here for the Modifiable connection endpoint along with a connection number as suffix With unspecified connections use this box to identify the partner If the station contains more than one CP of the same type connected Display only to the same subnet you can select the connection route gt R
74. then configured starting from a station or CPU in the current S7 project and then selecting a destination station Due to the networking the node addresses MAC or IP addresses of the two stations are already decided The local remote TSAPs Transport Service Access Point or ports at both ends of the connection are automatically assigned default values If the partner station is a station outside the current project or a non S7 station the remote TSAPs Transport Service Access Point or ports must be specified in the Properties dialog of the connection The endpoint of the connection to a SIMATIC S7 station is always a CPU A separate connection table is created for each CPU and displays the connection partner and types of connections Creating a New Connection To configure a new connection the stations and their CPs must be configured and networked in the S7 project To create a new connection follow the steps below In NetPro follow the steps below 1 In NetPro select the station or the CPU in the station from which you want to establish the connection 2 Select the menu command Insert gt New Connections also available with the right mouse button Result The following dialog appears on the screen S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 101 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections Insert New Connection Connection Partner ES Inthe curr
75. this area For more detailed information on this data type refer to the STEP 7 online help under the topic Format of the Parameter Type ANY You will also find a detailed description of the ANY pointer in 17 1 This function is possible only with the block library V5 0 SP3 or later S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 179 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs 7 2 3 Status Information output parameters For status evaluation the following parameters must be evaluated in the user program e DONE or NDR These parameters DONE with send jobs and NDR with receive jobs signal successful completion of the job e ERROR This indicates that the job could not be executed error free e STATUS This parameter supplies detailed information about the execution of the job Status codes can be returned during execution of the job DONE 0 and ERROR 0 Evaluating Status Codes Remember that the status codes DONE NDR ERROR STATUS are updated at each block call Status Codes during CP Startup A 180 With a complete restart or restart of the Ethernet CP after activating a switch on the module the output parameters of the FC are reset as follows e DONE 0 e NDR 0 e ERROR 0 e STATUS 8180 for AG_RECV AG_LRECV or 8181 for AG_SEND AG_LSEND S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007
76. used with any other device to access the S7 system memory areas To be able to use this type of access for example for PC applications you need to know the PDU structure of the jobs The required S7 or S5 header for request and response frames are 16 bytes long and their structure is described in this chapter a Structure of WRITE Frames The meaning and values of parameters shown without values in the following table can be found in the section Parameter Values WRITE request frame WRITE acknowledgment frame 0 System ID S 0 System ID aS 1 o 1 so7 2 Length of header 16d 2 Length of header 16d 3 ID OP code 01 3 ID OP code 01 4 Length OP code 03 4 Length OP code 03 5 OP code 03 5 OP code 04 6 ORG field 03 6 Ack field 0Fh 7 Length ORG field 08 7 Length ack field 03 8 ORG ID 8 Error field No 9 Empty field FFh A Start address High Byte A Length empty field 07 B Low Byte B C Length High Byte C D Low Byte D free FFh E F Length empty field 02 F Data up to 64 K S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 302 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 a Structure of FETCH Frames The meaning and values of parameters shown without values in the following table can be found in the section P
77. 0 Status 8180 or DONE 0 ERROR 1 Status 8183 applies to FCs as of version 4 0 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 185 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs 7 3 1 FC5 AG_SEND FC50 AG _LSEND FC53 AG_SSEND Meaning of the Block The FCs AG_SEND AG_LSEND AG_SSEND pass data to the Ethernet CP for transfer over a configured connection The selected data area can be a memory bit area or a data block area Error free execution of the function is indicated when the entire user data area could be sent over Ethernet The way in which the FC functions depends on the CP type you are using Please note the differences in the following section Note Unless otherwise stated all the following information applies to equally to the FCs AG_SEND AG_LSEND and AG_SSEND Call Call interface in FBD representation AG SEND AG_LSEND AG SSEND DONE ERROR f STATUS FF Example in STL representation STL Explanation call fc 5 AG_SEND block call ACT M 10 0 Job triggered by memory bit ID MW 12 Connection ID acc to configuration LADDR W 16 0100 LADDR 256 dec in HW configuration SEND P db99 dbx10 0 byte 240 Buffer with send data LEN MW 14 Length for send data DONE M 10 1 Execution code ERROR M 10 2 Exrror code STATUS MW 16 Status code S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commission
78. 0 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs Specifying the Data Area on the CPU When you call an FC you transfer the address and length of the data area in the CPU Remember that the maximum length of the data area depends on the block type and block version being used e AG SEND and AG_RECV Up to version V3 0 of these blocks a maximum of 240 bytes could be sent or received The current block versions allow a data area of up to 8192 bytes for an S7 300 With an S7 400 the FCs AG_LSEND AG_LRECV must still be used for larger data areas e AG LSEND AG LRECV Using the CPs of the S7 400 and with earlier versions of the S7 300 larger data areas can only be transferred with the FCs AG_LSEND or AG_LRECV Please check the length of the data area in the product information e AG SSEND AG SRECV With CPs of the S7 400 that support PROFINET communication in conjunction with CPUs as of version 5 1 data can be transmitted at a higher transmission rate using the FCs AG_SSEND and AG_SRECV For information on the CP types supported by CPUs as of version 5 1 refer to the manual of your CP Section Requirements for Use The following table shows the limit values for the data area of the various connection types Table 7 1 Maximum Data Length for the Various Connection Types FC ISO Transport ISO on TCP TCP UDP AG_LSEND 8192 bytes 8192 bytes 8192 bytes 2048 bytes S7 400 AG_SEND S7 300
79. 00 Station 2 pa P sep SIMATIC 400 Station 3 The addresses from 224 0 1 0 through 239 255 255 255 are available for IF E SIMATIC 501 multicast for further addresses refer to online helpl Unspecified Local Multicast group All broadcast stations IF dec 1408001 794010 All multicast stations F Ep In unknown project PORT dec 2000 2000 Eset Cancel Hep Station fail multicast stations Hadule Connection Type UDP connection M Display properties before inserting OF Apply Cancel Help S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 144 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 Notice 5 Configuring Communication Connections Make sure that the port used for multicast frames is different from the port addresses used for any configured UDP connections If a configured UDP connection uses the same port address these connections may be terminated by multicast frames Notice Within a multicast group you should assign identical PORT addresses for the local port and the partner port This is the only way that frames can be sent and also received by the CP within a multicast group Note the following example of three nodes in the multicast group Ethernet station A UDP connection PORT local IP multicast group 224 0 1 0 PORT multicast group 2001 2001 Ethernet station B UDP connection IP multicast group 224 0 1 0 POR
80. 05 PORT dec e002 2000 Cancel Help Figure 5 16 Layout of the Properties Dialog in the Addresses tab with DEFAULT Ports for TCP Connections Ports The ports or port addresses define the access point to the user program within the station CPU They must be unique within the station CPU The following table shows the range of values Table 5 4 Application Note Port Addresses Fixed must not be used 0 Assigned as default should not be used well known ports 1 to 1024 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 130 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections Table 5 4 Fortsetzung Application Note Range used by NCM in which a free port address is searched for and assigned You can set any port address within this range Port Addresses from 2000 to 5000 Port addresses higher than 5000 are used by the system Note lf you want to use these port addresses please contact your system administrator from 5000 65535 The following port numbers are reserved you should not use these for other purposes in the connection project engineering Table 5 5 Reserved Port Numbers Protocol Port Number Service TCP FTP TCP SMTP 25 UDP 34964 PN IO UDP 65532 NTP UDP 65533 NTP UDP 65534 NTP UDP 65535 NTP S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007
81. 2 1 99 NAME ipconf Local port 4001 remote port 5001 estab active VERSION 1 0 07 June 2005 STRUCT DB TYP INT 1 M System Data sys_pb INT 0 Subfield type System data for CP sys id INT 0 System parameter ID always 0 sys_sb cnt INT 3 Number of subfields in System parameter field ip_addr SUB_IP_V4 IP address of the CP ip netmask SUB_NETMASK Subnet mask of the CP ip router SUB_DEF_ROUTER Default router M tcp VB Ol tcp pb 01 INT 1 Subfield type TCP connection tcp_id 01 f INT 1 1 TCP_VB tcp_sb_cnt_01 int 6 6 Elements per TCP connection tcp_vb_ip_01 SUB_IP_V4 IP address of the partner tcp_loc_01 f SUB_LOC_PORT tcp rem 01 SUB_REM PORT tcp vb 01 name CON NAME L tcp _vb 01 kbus SUB_KBUS_ADDR Relevant only for S7 400 rq 01 ACT_CN_REQ 1_ NNNNNNMNNNMNOO END_STRUCT BEGIN tcp_loc_01 port 4001 Definition of ports when value of tcp_rem_01 port 5001 differs from predefinition END_DATA_BLOCK JI masaren aaa end IP CONF DB 271 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 159 C79000 G8976 C182 08 6 Programmed Communication Connections The type definit
82. 21 Layout of the Properties Dialog in the Addresses Tab for the Free UDP Connection Mode S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 140 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections 5 7 3 UDP with Broadcast and Multicast Application When you select the connection partner you have the following two extra options on UDP connections e Connection to all Broadcast Nodes If you select the all broadcast nodes you specify that UDP frames are sent to all obtainable broadcast nodes Notice When using broadcast you can only send with S7 CPs reception is not possible see below e Connection to all Multicast Nodes If you select all multicast nodes as the partner you specify that UDP frames are sent to all nodes of a multicast group and that multicast frames can be received Multicast is a special configurable connection option that is supported by Industrial Ethernet CPs only on UDP connections The frames are sent without acknowledgment because the UDP protocol has no provision for acknowledgments This is designed to avoid floods of data resulting from the acknowledgments If for example frames are sent to 100 partners 100 acknowledgments 1 per partner will arrive at the same time The sending module would not be able to evaluate such a flurry of data When to Use Multicast instead of Broadcast To allow the simultaneous transmission of a
83. 3 9 with other CP types the code 80BOy is set instead Note FC10 in version V1 0 is supported by the CPs as of CP 343 1 EX21 GX21 this code does not occur with these modules 0 1 80901 e No module with this module start address exists or e The FC used does not match the system family being used different FCs must be used for S7 300 and S7 400 or e The function is not supported by this module 0 1 8091H The module start address is not on a double word boundary 0 1 80B0H The module does not recognize the data record 0 1 80C04 The data record cannot be read 0 1 80C1y The specified data record is currently being processed 0 1 80C2y There are too many jobs pending 0 1 80C3y CPU resources memory occupied 0 80C4 Communication error The error occurs temporarily it is usually best to repeat the job in the user program 80D24 The module start address is incorrect S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 213 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC10 AG_CNTRL Continued Commands and Evaluating the Job Results The following table shows you the possible commands and the results that can be evaluated in the RESULT1 2 parameters Table 7 7 Commands to FC AG_CNTRL CMD Meaning 0 NOP no operation The block executes without a job being sent to the CP
84. 5 Configuring Communication Connections Addresses Tab Specified UDP Connections The addresses tab displays proposed values for the relevant local and remote address information You can make the settings for the ports individually Properties UDP Connection E3 General Addresses Options Overview status Information The ports are valid in the range fram 1 to B5535 4 value higher than 1024 ts recommended since the well known ports are located in the range up to 1024 Local Remote IP dec 140 850 0 2 i 40 50 05 PORT dec zoog 2000 Cancel Help Figure 5 20 Layout of the Properties Dialog in the Addresses tab with DEFAULT Ports for UDP Connections Ports The ports or port addresses define the access point to the user program within the station CPU They must be unique within the station CPU The following table shows the range of values Table 5 6 Application Note Port Addresses Fixed must not be used 0 Assigned as default should not be used well known ports 1 to 1024 Range used by NCM in which a free port address is 2000 onwards searched for and assigned S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 138 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections The following port numbers are reserved you should not use these for other purposes in the connection project engineering Table 5 7 Reserved Port Numbers Pr
85. 7 Diagnostics See Chapter 8 Diagnostics for a description of the diagnostic functions themselves Addressing Tab In the Addressing tab you can assign the previously configured IP address and IP parameters to the CP This is necessary before the configuration data can be downloaded to the CP over Ethernet For a detailed description refer to Section 3 4 IP Access Protection Tab Using IP access protection gives you the opportunity of restricting communication over the CP of the local S7 station to partners with specific IP addresses Partners 5 2 1 you have not authorized cannot access data of the S7 station over the CP using the IP protocol S7 connections In this tab you can activate or deactivate IP access protection and can enter IP addresses in an IP access control list IP ACL S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 68 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with Attempted access that was blocked is registered on the CP You can view these entries with NCM Diagnostics in the IP access protection object If the CP has IT functionality an archive file LOG file is also created in the file system of the CP and you can view this with a WEB browser You will find the LOG file as an HTML file in the file system of the CP in the following folder ram security IPLogFile htm As default IP access protection is deactivated e P access protection for c
86. 7 FB12 BSEND X STEP 7 communication FB13 BRCV oe FB15 PUT xX FB14 GET X FB8 USEND xX FB9 URCV xX FC62 C_CNTRL X S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 175 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs Communicatio Block Type SIMATIC Manager Library Described in Lah sa SIMATIC_NET_CP Area CP 300 CP 400 FTP IT CPs FC40 FTP CONNECT xX xX SIMATIC NET FC41 FTP_STORE x x ae mente FC42 FTP RETRIEVE X x FC43 FTP DELETE x x FC44 FTP_QUIT X xX PROFINET CBA FB88 1 PN_InOut 1 x 1 x 1 Section 7 7 FB90 1 PN_InOut Fast x 1 Section 7 7 PROFINET IO FC11 PNIO SEND xX Section 7 8 FC12 PNIO_RECV xX Section 7 8 FB52 PNIO_RW_REC x Section 7 8 FB54 PNIO_ ALARM xX Section 7 8 1 FB88 FB90 is supplied along with the engineering tool SIMATIC iMap and is entered in the PROFINET system library when you install the STEP 7 add on 2 Not to be used with the current CPs and not part of the current SIMATIC_NET_CP library 3 depending on the CP type Which Block Version Should I Use The following descriptions also include information on differences between the various block versions Please take note of the version identifiers of the blocks you are using The SIMATIC Manager block libraries installed with STEP 7 NCM S7 contain the block versions that were current at the time of t
87. 76 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections Organization in a Multiproject If interproject subnets are configured you can also configure Connections over such subnets using STEP 7 V5 2 The endpoints of these connections can be located in different projects 7 St Ate As f g 7 E gt STEP 7 supports you both when creating interproject connections within a multiproject as well as when synchronizing connections that were configured without a multiproject context S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 97 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections 5 3 Connections Characteristics of a Connection A communication connection allows program controlled communication between two nodes on Industrial Ethernet with the following characteristics e The data transfer is bi directional in other words it is possible to transmit and receive on the connection simultaneously e Both stations have the same rights in other words each station can trigger the send and receive procedures in response to events e The address of the communication partner is specified in the configuration Exceptions to this are free UDP connections Here the address is specified at the FC interface in the user program programmed communication connections see Chapter 6 SIMATIC S7 station Ethernet with Ethernet CP node send _ ee gt receive Communi
88. 90 is to transfer data from the interface DB to the CP and from the CP to the interface DB The interface DB itself is the interface to the user program FB88 FB90 is called cyclically It is also possible to call FB88 FB90 more than once in a cycle At its interface FB88 FB90 only needs to be supplied with the module address of the CP To ensure data consistency you can only modify the data to be transferred or start to read the received data when the job is completed DONE 1 or ERROR 1 As soon as DONE 1 or ERROR 1 are set the transfer is complete or has been terminated with an error message Data can now be evaluated or set again Data will only be transferred with the next call In your user program make sure that on completion of data transfer FB88 FB90 is called again only after all the input data have been read and all output data have been written to the interface DB Calling the FB88 FB90 blocks time driven is permitted in principle Refer to the notes on this mode later in this chapter Differences between FB88 and FB90 The activities of the function blocks FB90 and FB88 on the interface to the user program are largely identical You can use FB90 with certain CP CPU types with an S7 400 refer to the information in the manual of the CP If FB90 is approved for the CP type being used we recommend that you use it This allows you to achieve shorter reaction times than with FB88 However note the constraints rega
89. C PG with Ethernet CP e Other station with Industrial Ethernet attachment S7 400 Hai a Ethernet E A PG PC with Ethernet Other station with attachment Ethernet attachment SIMATIC S5 with Ethernet CP _ WAN Internet only TCP IP Router Figure 1 5 SIMATIC S7 PLC with Possible Communications Partners on the SEND RECEIVE Interface S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 33 C79000 G8976 C182 08 1 Communication via Ethernet CPs in S7 Stations 1 6 FETCH WRITE Services Server Application In addition to the SEND RECEIVE interface the FETCH WRITE functionality provides further services for S5 compatible communication on configured transport connections The FETCH WRITE interface is used primarily to attach SIMATIC S7 to SIMATIC S5 and to other non S7 stations for example PCs e FETCH The partner on the connection SIMATIC S5 or non S7 station can read system data on the SIMATIC S7 PLC e WRITE The partner on the connection SIMATIC S5 or non S7 station can write system data on the SIMATIC S7 PLC From the point of view of the SIMATIC S7 PLC this is a passive communication function that simply needs to be configured the communications partner initiates the connection establishment For further information refer to the system documentation of the SIMATIC S5 PLC or the non S7 station you are using Connection Types To acces
90. C79000 G8976 C182 08 A 131 5 Configuring Communication Connections Addresses Tab Unspecified TCP Connection If you select the partner type as unspecified depending on your task you can enter address information about the communication partner here The options available to you are explained in detail in Section 5 3 1 The Addresses tab shown here illustrates the situation in which the remote port but not the IP address was specified If you make no further entries you are accepting connection establishment with any communication partner that uses the specified port Properties TCP Connection Figure 5 17 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 132 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections 5 6 3 Checking TCP Connection Properties Overview Tab The overview shows all the previously configured TCP connections and their parameters cannot be modified here You can adjust the width of the columns in the table For an example of this display refer to Section 5 3 4 the ISO transport connection Parameter Description ID This is the connection ID of the TCP connection STEP 7 connection configuration DWORD Name loc endpoint Entered connection name It identifies the TCP connection 8 character double width CPU Applications If you display all the ISO transport connections being operated in this station in the multiprocessor mod
91. CP is possible over MPI or LAN Industrial Ethernet The version of STEP 7 released for the device type is necessary ee TP port beneath the front panel X Placeholder for hardware version Figure 2 1 Example Front View of the CP 343 1 Lean A 46 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 2 Characteristics of the Ethernet CPs 2 2 Communications Processors for S7 400 The modules are designed to match the components of the S7 400 S7 400H programmable logic controller and have the following features LED displays Mode selector Ind Ethernet interface 4 x 8 pin RJ 45 Socket Single width modules for simple installation in the S7 400 S7 400H rack Can be used in central or expansion racks The operator controls and displays are all located on the front panel No fan necessary 8 pin RJ 45 jack for attachment of the CP to twisted pair Ethernet and 15 pin sub D female connector with slide locking mechanism for attachment of the CP to Industrial Ethernet depending on the module type automatic switchover between AUI interface and Industrial Twisted Pair interface when the cable AUI or ITP is connected or 4 x 8 pin RJ 45 jack for attachment of the CP to twisted pair Ethernet The project engineering of the CP is possible over MPI or LAN Industrial Ethernet The version of STEP 7 released for the device type is necessary MAC address l
92. CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections 5 5 Configuring ISO on TCP Connections Properties Introduction When you create a connection in the New dialog you specify the connection type and as far as possible the connection partner When necessary you can adapt other connection partners that are set as default when you create a new connection as described below Opening the Dialog To call the dialog for special connection properties follow the steps outlined below 1 Select the required connection in the connection table 2 Select the menu option Edit gt Object Properties Result The Properties ISO on TCP Connection dialog appears Tabs The following tabs are available for ISO on TCP connections General Displays parameters that identify the connection Addresses Displays the local and remote address information Options Here you can decide whether or not you want to use the connection for one of the access types FETCH or WRITE Overview This is an overview of all the configured SO on TCP connections of the selected S7 station with their parameters and the status of the connection Status Information This tab displays the current status information for the connection valid at the time the dialog is opened This information corresponds to that displayed by NCM diagnostics S7 CPs for Industria
93. Configuration and Diagnostics To connect and configure the Ethernet CP you require the STEP 7 configuration software and the SIMATIC NET NCM S7 option NCM S7 is installed as a STEP 7 option automatically and is therefore integrated in STEP 7 NCM S7 for Industrial Ethernet also provides a wide range of diagnostic functions for the various types of communication When configuring PROFINET communication you also use the engineering tool SIMATIC iMap for detailed information on SIMATIC iMap refer to the manual Component based Automation Configuring Plants with SIMATIC iMap 19 Programmed Communication Connections In some situations it is an advantage to set up communication connections not over the configuration interface of STEP 7 but program controlled by specific B 2 1 applications As of STEP 7 V5 2 SP1 a function block is available for these applications that allows flexible transfer of data blocks with configuration data to an Ethernet CP S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 22 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 1 Communication via Ethernet CPs in S7 Stations 1 3 PG OP Communication via Industrial Ethernet Application PG OP communication provides functions that are already integrated in every SIMATIC S7 M7 C7 device A distinction must be made between the following two types of function e PG communication PG communication with STEP 7 PLCs on Industrial Ethernet means the
94. Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 1 Communication via Ethernet CPs in S7 Stations 1 4 S7 Communication on Industrial Ethernet Application S7 communication via Industrial Ethernet allows program controlled communication using communication SFBs FBs via configured S7 connections Per job up to 64 Kbytes of user data can be transmitted The Ethernet CP acts as an S7 communication relay by passing on the S7 functions via Industrial Ethernet Depending on the configuration of the Ethernet CP data transfer is on the basis of the ISO transport or the ISO on TCP protocol TCP IP with RFC 1006 From the perspective of the user S7 communication is identical over PROFIBUS and Industrial Ethernet Nodes Two situations must be distinguished depending on device type and plant configuration e Client and server functionality at both ends S7 connections can be operated between the following nodes with the entire functionality of S7 communication between 7 stations S7 300 and S7 400 between S7 stations and PC PG stations with an Ethernet CP sh AO on p uI os HERE ioe l Ethernet PUT GET BSEND BRECV WAN USEND URECV only TCP IP PC PG with Ethern
95. Continued CMD Meaning 6 CN_DISCON connection disconnect This command resets the connection selected with ID and LADDR The connection reset is achieved by a connection abort Any data in the stack is lost without any message being displayed There is then no automatic establishment of the connection The connection can be established again by the control job CN STARTCON A diagnostic buffer entry is generated that can be found in the job result RESULT for CMD 6 Meaning Parameter Hex value range RESULT 1 0000 00011 The job was transferred to the CP successfully The connection abort was initiated RESULT1 0000 00021 The connection abort job could not be transferred to the CP because the service has not started on the CP for example CP in STOP RESULT2 0000 0000 Default CMD Meaning 7 CN_STARTCON start connection This command establishes a connection selected with ID and LADDR and aborted earlier with the control job CN _DISCON A diagnostic buffer entry is generated that can be found in the job result RESULT for CMD 7 Meaning Parameter Hex value range RESULT 1 0000 0001 The connection establishment job was transferred to the CP successfully The connection establishment was initiated RESULT 1 0000 00021 The connection establishment job could not be transferred to the CP because the service has not started on the CP for example CP in STOP
96. END FC12 PNIO_RECV These FCs are now also used for the PROFINET IO device mode of the CP 343 1 Lean New in release 05 STEP7 V5 4 C79000 G8976 C182 05 Apart from various adaptations to the currently supplied devices and the current version of STEP 7 NCM S7 V5 4 the following features were included e New blocks for user programs There is anew block FB90 PN_ InOut_Fast previously known as PN_IO_X available for PROFINET CBA e Corrections and additions to the block description S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 306 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 F Document History Corrections or additions have been made to the following FCs FBs FB88 PN_InOut FB90 PN_InOut_Fast FB55 IP_CONFIG FC11 PNIO SEND FC 12 PNIO_RECV New in release 04 STEP7 V5 3 SP3 C79000 G8976 C182 03 Apart from various adaptations to the currently supplied devices and the current version of STEP 7 NCM S7 V5 4 the following features were included e New blocks for user programs There is a new block FB90 PN_IO_X available for PROFINET CBA New in release 03 STEP 7 V5 3 SP3 C79000 G8976 C182 03 Apart from various adaptations to the currently supplied devices and the current version of STEP 7 NCM S7 V5 3 SP2 SP3 the following features were included e New blocks for user programs There is anew block FC10 AG_CNTRL available for the SEND RECEIVE interface There are also
97. Ethernet CPs FC10 AG_CNTRL Continued How the Block Works The following diagram shows a typical sequence of AG_CNTRL jobs in the user program User program Ethernet CP CPU cycle An event is detected that makes it useful to abort and reestablish a connection supply AG_CNTRL for status query ACT 1 CMD 1 ID 1 connection AG_CNTRL status query Status query for connection 1 is acknowledged Status connection ID11 supply AG_CNTRL for reset ACT 1 CMD 2 ID 1 connection AG_CNTRL reset command Reset request active Reset ID bit 15 in Acknowledgment of job accep RESULT 1 is set tance RESULT1 connection establish ment triggered Siena ee Entry in diagnostic buf fer Connection is terminated and reinitialized supply AG_CNTRL for status query ACT 1 CMD 1 ID 1 connection Reset ID bit 15 in RESULT1 remains set AG_CNTRL status query Status query is Status connection ID11 acknowledged Acknowledgment RESULT1 B0954 then the reset ID bit 15 in RESULT1 is cleared Reset was executed 1 Time Time Legend 1 Parameter transfer DONE ERROR STATUS and RESULT1 2 The diagram shows how the connection status is initially queried and then in a second job how the connection termination is triggered with the reset command S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 210 Release 09 2007
98. G station must also have routing capability In this situation configure a one ended S7 connection to the S7 station in the other subnet for the PC PG station in STEP 7 NetPro You can then read and write data in the S7 station in your user program using the services for S7 communication S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 30 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 1 Communication via Ethernet CPs in S7 Stations 1 5 5 compatible Communication SEND RECEIVE Interface Application Using the SEND RECEIVE interface your S7 user program has access to 5 compatible communication with configured transport connections Data transmission over a configured transport connection is suitable for the following types of transmission e the reliable transmission of related blocks of data between two Ethernet nodes using TCP see 13 with ISO on TCP connection see 14 or TCP connection ISO transport connection not with PROFINET CBA e simple unacknowledged transfer of related blocks of data datagram service between two Ethernet nodes with UDP User Datagram Protocol on IP The SEND RECEIVE interface is also suitable for sending E mail refer to the manual for the IT CP 5 For TCP applications there is an active network with IP protocol see 16 ISO Transport Connection ISO transport provides services for the reliable transfer of data on configured connections Due to segmentation packe
99. G8976 C182 08 B Standards and Approvals for SIMATIC NET S7 CPs Warning Personal injury and damage to property may occur In hazardous areas injury to persons or damage to equipment can result if you make or break an electrical circuit during operation of a SIMATIC NET S7 CP for example with plug in connectors fuses switches WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD DO NOT DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT WHEN A FLAMMABLE OR COMBUSTIBLE ATMOSPHERE IS PRESENT When used in hazardous areas division 2 or zone 2 the device must be installed in an enclosure S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 288 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 C References and Literature Manuals and Further Information 1 2 3 4 For installation and commissioning of the CP SIMATIC S7 S7 300 Automation System Hardware and Installation Installation manual Module Data Reference manual Siemens AG and SIMATIC S7 S7 400 M7 400 Automation System Hardware and Installation Installation manual Module Data Reference manual Siemens AG For using and configuring the CP Manual S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Part of the manual package NCM S7 for SIMATIC NET CPs the online documentation in STEP 7 Siemens AG For using and configuring the CP NCM S7 for SIMATIC NET CPs Primer Part of the manual package NCM 7 for PROFIBUS the online documentation in STEP 7
100. GOOD necessary to evaluate the IOCS status area 1 At least one IOCS set to BAD lOCS OUTPUT ANY as The address of A status bit is transferred per byte of user VARTYP the data area data E only points to one of The length information depends on the BYTE is the alternatives length in the LEN parameter one bit per permitted e Memory bit byte area Length LEN 7 8 Data block Controller mode nae Address gaps are also transferred according Length to the SEND parameter For the maximum value refer to the device specific Part B of this manual in the Performance Data chapter This may differ for controller or device mode Address gaps are transferred with the status GOOD Device mode Address gaps are not transferred The block begins the transfer of the status for address 0 Notes e The minimum length of the ANY pointer is length LEN 7 8 A 236 Note Remember that all output parameters may only be evaluated when the block signals either DONE 1 or ERROR 1 Notice You must assume that the returned IOCS status does not arrive time synchronized with the data SEND parameter but delayed by one user program cycle This means User data and IOCS are not consistent S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC11 PNIO_ SEND continued
101. H 8F424 8F43H4 8F44n Area length error reading a parameter e g DB too short Area length error writing a parameter e g DB too short Area error reading a parameter Area error writing a parameter Alignment error reading a parameter Alignment error writing a parameter The parameter is in the write protected first current data block The parameter is in the write protected second current data block The parameter contains a DB number that is too high DB number error The target area was not loaded DB Timeout reading a parameter from the I O area Timeout writing a parameter to the I O area Address of the parameter to be read is disabled in the accessed rack S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 A 225 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FB55 IP_CONFIG continued Table 7 9 Condition Codes for FB55 IP_CONFIG continued DONE A 226 r ERROR STATUS 8F45n SF7Fu Meaning Address of the parameter to be written is disabled in the accessed rack Internal error For example an illegal ANY reference was detected S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs 7 7 FB88 PN_InOut FB90 PN_InOut_Fast blocks for PROFINET CBA How It Works The task of function block FB88 FB
102. IBUS Ethernet station node to another S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 293 C79000 G8976 C182 08 D Glossary Frame header A frame header consists of an identifier for the gt frame and the source and destination address Frame trailer A frame trailer consists of a checksum and the end identifier of the gt frame Functions FCs STEP 7 code blocks of the type function Gateway Intelligent connectivity device that connects local area gt networks of different types at the ISO Layer 7 level Industrial Ethernet A LAN system complying with IEEE 802 3 ISO 8802 2 Multicast A multicast is like calling all group stations Using one multicast frame you can reach all the nodes that belong to the multicast group and that are prepared to receive frames NCM S7 for Industrial Ethernet Configuration software for configuration and diagnostic functions on an Ethernet CP NCM S7 for PROFIBUS Configuration software for configuration and diagnostic functions on a PROFIBUS CP Network A network consists of one or more interconnected gt subnets with any number of gt nodes Several networks can exist side by side S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 294 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 D Glossary PC station PC station means a PC with communications modules and applications This PC is intended for example to communicate with SIMA
103. IC S7 300 while the power is on not permitted You should also remember that by removing a module from the rack all modules on the other side of it will be disconnected from the CPU S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 49 C79000 G8976 C182 08 2 Characteristics of the Ethernet CPs 2 4 Slot Rules for SIMATIC S7 400 2 4 1 Permissible Slots An S7 400 CP can be inserted both in the central rack and in the expansion rack with a K bus interface For the total number of CPs you can install please refer to the information on the relevant CP in the Properties chapter In the SIMATIC S7 400 there is no set slot assignment for the SIMATIC NET CPs Slots 2 to 18 are permissible Note however that depending on the power supply module installed slot 1 may also occupy slots 2 3 4 during redundant operation 2 4 2 Number of SIMATIC NET CPs The number of SIMATIC NET CPs that can be operated simultaneously is limited by the specific characteristics of the CPU The exact number can be found in the CP specific section of this manual 2 4 3 Multicomputing The communication load can be distributed by installing several SIMATIC NET CPs distribution of load If however you want to increase the number of available connection resources you can insert several CPUs in a rack multicomputing All S7 400 CPUs in a rack can communicate via one or more SIMATIC NET CPs The following communicatio
104. M 10 2 Exrror code STATUS MW 16 Status code EXT STATUS MW 18 Cause of error in connection data S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 220 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FB55 IP_CONFIG continued How It Works The following diagram illustrates the normal sequence of connection configuration triggered by an IP_CONFIG in the user program The job executes as soon as the parameter ACT is transferred with value 1 Due to the segmented transfer of the CONF_DB you will need to repeat the job with ACT 1 until completion of the job is indicated in the parameters DONE ERROR and STATUS If you want to transfer a connection configuration again later the parameter ACT must first be transferred with value O in at least one further call User program Ethernet CP CPU cycle Supply CONF_DB with data Set ACT 1 5 ON 0 0 Job active CP is supplied with system data CONF DBis including the IP address transferred in Connections are configured on the segments CP all IP CONFI 0 0 Job active all IP CONFI Job completed without rror Set ACT 0 all IP_CONFI Time Time Legend 1 Parameter transfer DONE ERROR STATUS Notice The data transferred with the configuration DB are stored in volatile memory on the CP and must be downloaded to the CP again following a power down S7 CPs for
105. NIO_RW_REC 1 0 FB52 1648 1390 1354 62 PNIO_ALARM 1 0 FB54 1178 970 934 62 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 257 C79000 G8976 C182 08 8 NCM S7 Diagnostics A 258 The NCM S7 Diagnostics described here provides dynamic information on the operating state of the communication functions of online CPs This chapter provides a general overview of the individual diagnostic functions The following checklist will help you to recognize several typical problems and their possible causes and shows how you can use the NCM S7 for PROFIBUS diagnostics tool to remedy the situation Further information is available from the following sources e When you are working with the diagnostic tool the integrated help system provides you with context related support e You will find detailed information on working with STEP 7 programs in the Help on STEP 7 which includes the topic Diagnosing Hardware Note NCM S7 Diagnostics supports not only diagnostics for CPs communication modules but also other module types such as the IE PB Link In this chapter the term CP is therefore synonymous with all modules with which you can run NCM S7 diagnostic functions S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 8 1 8 NCM S7 Diagnostics Overview Diagnostic Options in STEP 7 STEP 7 provides you with a graded concept allowing you to query informat
106. P ISO on TCP UDP A 70 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with Note You can query the IP address actually being used with NCM S7 Diagnostics Port Parameters Tab Here you can when necessary make fixed network settings for the transmission properties of every available port As default Automatic Setting is selected and this setting generally guarantees problem free communication in most situations If problems occur in communication for example when connections are not established or when there are often disturbances on the network the reason may be that the selected or automatic network settings are not suitable You can then select a network setting to suit your network configuration S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 71 C79000 G8976 C182 08 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with FTP tab In this dialog you can create modify a file allocation table With the information in the file allocation table it is possible to address data blocks in one or more CPUs up to 4 in an S7 station Ethernet CP as FTP server for S7 CPU data To transfer data with FTP create data blocks in the CPU of your S7 station due to their special structure these are known here as file DBs When it receives an FTP command the Ethernet CP as FTP server obtains the information a
107. P1 of the NCM S7for Industrial Ethernet configuration software and version 5 2 SP1 of the STEP 7 software These include new functions for IP configuration IP Access Protection Using IP access protection gives you the opportunity of restricting access to the local S7 station to partners with specific IP addresses Configuring connections from the user program In some situations it is an advantage to set up communication connections not over the configuration interface of STEP 7 but program conirolled by specific applications As of STEP 7 V5 2 SP1 a function block is available for these applications that allows flexible transfer of data blocks with configuration data to an Ethernet CP The description of the configuration for FETCH WRITE services has been extended New in release 06 STEP7 V5 2 C79000 G8976 C 129 06 S7 communication over routers single ended client and server functionality via an IE PB Link or CP Multiprojects With the new multiproject functionality projects can be split up and distributed for engineering and then merged again New in release 05 STEP7 V5 1 SP3 C79000 G8976 C129 05 A 308 Configuring multicast and broadcast on UDP connections See Chapter 5 The blocks AG_SEND and AG_RECV can now be used for long data packets with an S7 300 See Chapter 7 The S7 CPs for Ind Ethernet are now supplied with a default MAC address allowing configuration data to be downloaded
108. PG station communicate with the S7 station over an OPC interface or SAPI S7 interface for operator intervention monitoring and control The S7 stations use the integrated communication SFBs FBs client and server functionality at both ends The following general requirements must be met by a PC PG station for S7 communication e The following are installed in the PC PG an Ethernet CP there is an interface for S7 communication installed SOFTNET S7 for Ind Ethernet or software from the SIMATIC NET CD e The CPs in the S7 stations are supplied with a MAC IP address use the default MAC address or set an IP address To use S7 communication with the SIMATIC S7 PLC from a PC address the required CPU module in the SIMATIC S7 PLC that you want to communicate with in your PC application S7 communication via routers one ended client and server functionality It is possible to reach the S7 station from an application OPC server of the 5 9 PC PG station that is attached to another subnet The subnets must be connected T over a router such as the IE PB Link An S7 station or a PC connected to both subnets can also serve as a router In this configuration the S7 station can only be addressed by the PC PG station as a communications server on S7 connections configured at one end The requirements for the configuration of the PC PG station are identical to those for operation in the same subnet see above the CP in the PC P
109. PNIOQ RW_REC codes DONE ERROR STATUS Meaning 81804 Data transfer active 00004 Data record transferred successfully l T 81834 e No PNIO controller configuration e wrong CPLADDR or e CP in STOP mode 81841 System error or illegal parameter type 8185H Destination buffer RECORD is too short 8F22H Area length error reading a parameter e g DB too short 8F23H Area length error writing a parameter e g DB too short 8F24H Area error reading a parameter 8F25H Area error writing a parameter 8F28H Alignment error reading a parameter 8F 294 Alignment error writing a parameter 8F30H Parameter is in the write protected first active data block 8F31H Parameter is in the write protected second active data block 8F32H Parameter contains a DB number that is too high 8F3AH Destination area not loaded DB 8F424 Timeout reading a parameter from the I O area 8F43n Timeout writing a parameter to the I O area 8F44H Address of the parameter to be read is disabled in the accessed rack 8F45xH Address of the parameter to be written is disabled in the accessed rack 8F7Fu Internal error e g illegal ANY reference 1 7 3 a i 8090 Module with this address does not exist Negative acknowledgment reading from the module 80A1h Negative acknowledgment writing to the module 80A3H General PROFINET IO context management error 80A9xH PROFINET IO device or module reports an illegal type 80B0u Module does not recogn
110. Parameter error Wrong CP address 0 1 8322h only with FB90 Bad interface DB 0 1 83324 only with FB90 The number of the interface DB is too high O 1 833A only with FB90 Access to the interface DB is not possible possibly because the interface DB was deleted 0 1 86234 only with FB90 Bad interface DB 0 1 863AH only with FB90 Access to the interface DB is not possible possibly because the interface DB was deleted To find out which SFCs are used that are relevant for error evaluation display the properties dialog of the FB described here in the Calls tab Note For entries with the coding 8Fxxy for S7 300 or 8xxxy for S7 400 under STATUS note the information in the Reference Manual STEP 7 Standard and system Functions The chapter describing error evaluation with the RET VAL output parameter contains detailed information S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 231 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FB88 PN_InOut FB90 PN_InOut_Fast continued Status Codes during CP Startup With a complete restart or restart of the PROFINET CP after activating a switch on the module the output parameters of the block are reset as follows DONE 0 e ERROR 0 e STATUS 81814 Time driven call recommendation on application If your application requires time driven transfer of the CBA data instead of cycl
111. Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC 12 PNIO_RECV continued Parame Decla Type Possible Remarks ter ration Values LEN INPUT INT Value gt 0 Length of the data area to be transferred in The maximum bytes total length of the The transfer of the data always begins with data to be address 0 regardless of the configuration transferred can be Please note that the IO address 0 with a found in the length of 1 is included device specific Controller mode E ol ils e The highest configured address of the manual in the i devices must be specified here The Performance dividual i toaa Data chapter individual areas are not grouped together They may differ e The data is transferred in the order of the for controller or logical addresses as with PROFIBUS device mode DP Device mode e The data is transferred in the order of the slots corresponding to the configuration of the input modules on the PROFINET IO controller line for this PROFINET IO device e Note Make sure that the length programmed here and the configuration of the PROFINET IO controller are consistent The entire data area length including any gaps is transferred for the device NDR OUTPUT BOOL 0 This parameter indicates whether or not the 1 Data accepted job was completed without errors ERROR OUTPUT BOOL 0 Error code 1 Error STATUS OUTPUT WORD Status code See Table 7 12 Page A 243 CHECK_ O
112. ROFINET PROFIBUS and the AS interface AS i Industrial Ethernet IEEE 802 3 PROFINET PROFIBUS EN 50170 Vol 2 PROFIBUS AS Interface AS i Actuator Sensor Interface Figure 1 1 Industrial Ethernet in the SIMATIC NET Concept Network Access Industrial Ethernet is accessed using the CSMA CD Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection network access technique specified in IEEE 802 3 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 16 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 1 Communication via Ethernet CPs in S7 Stations 1 2 SIMATIC S7 Communication with S7 Ethernet CPs 1 2 1 Possible Types of Communication The Ethernet CP for SIMATIC S7 supports the following types of communication depending on the CP type Ethernet CP gt S7 400 j i jen Interfaces Services Possible types of communication Protocols e PG OP communication with the protocols e S7 communication IS TCP IP RFC 1006 e 5 compatible communication with the SEND RECEIVE interface and the protocols ISO Transport ISO on TCP TCP IP with RFC 1006 TCP UDP E mail with FETCH WRITE services and the protocols ISO Transport ISO on TCP TCP e PROFINET IO with the protocols and TCP PROFINET CBA RT PROFINET IO and CBA IRT PROFINET IO DCOM PROFINET CBA e HTML process control with with the protocols Web browser HTTP IP protocol e File management and file with
113. Receiving on a Free UDP Connection with Programmed Addresses e Inthe diagram entries in hexadecimal the following IP address is assumed 142 11 40 35 example only e For the port address 1003 the following would be entered for high byte 031 for low byte EBy e The user data area can be up to 2048 bytes long Up to 2042 bytes of user data can be transferred 6 bytes are reserved for the job header Please note that the data length specified in the block call LEN parameter must include the header and the user data S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 184 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs Change Call Parameters only after Job Confirmation Notice Once the job has been triggered you can only change the call parameters of the FC call interface of the FCs AG_SEND or AG_RECV after the FC has confirmed completion of the job with DONE 1 or with ERROR 1 If you do not keep to this rule it is possible that the job will be aborted with an error Status display on the FC call interface Special case with FC versions only for S7 300 With the FCs AG_SEND FC5 and AG_RECV FC6 you will receive the codes shown below in the following situations e CP is in STOP e Connection is not configured e Connection is not established e Connection is aborted Codes e AG SEND DONE 0 ERROR 1 Status 8183 e AG RECV DONE 0 ERROR
114. S7 station and the required partner stations in your STEP 7 projects refer to the description in Chapter 3 2 You have clarified the other station types with which connections must be established You create substitute objects for these station types in your STEP 7 projects Setting up Connections and Using Them in the User Program Follow the steps outlined below to set up connections on the SIMATIC S7 PLC using the user program Configuring Set the CP Properties in Programming the IP Configuration tab Create system data and Select the Set IP connections in the configuration DB address in user program option Program the SEND RECEIVE interface in the user program Specify the connection Refer to Section 4 2 and the characteristics in the detailed FC description in Configuration DB Chapter 7 eas ee 2i Program FB interface in the user program Download configurations and user programs to the S7 station necessary steps optional steps S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 157 C79000 G8976 C182 08 6 Programmed Communication Connections 6 3 Configuration Data Block Meaning The configuration data block CONF_DB contains all the connection data and configuration data IP address subnet mask default router NTP time server and other parameters for an Ethernet CP The configuration data block is transferred to the CP wi
115. SIEMENS SIMATIC NET S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Manual Part A General Application Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 Preface Contents Communication in S7 Stations Characteristics of the Ethernet CPs Commissioning an Ethernet CP SEND RECEIVE interface Configuring Connections Programmed Connections FCs Functions and FBs NCM 7 Diagnostics Firmware Loader 2 H Ea Ba Ka ol Appendix A E Index Classification of Safety Related Notices gt This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety as well as to protect the product and connected equipment These notices are highlighted in the manual by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to the level of danger Danger indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken Warning indicates that death or severe personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken Caution with warning triangle indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken Caution without warning triangle indicates that damage to property can result if proper precautions are not taken Notice indicates that an undesirable result or status can occur if the relevant notice is ignored Note highlights important information on the product using the
116. SIMATIC NET Manual Collection and on the paper version that can be ordered separately The examples described in Primer can also be found in the project folder for sample programs after you have installed STEP 7 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 5 C79000 G8976 C182 08 This manual Audience This manual is intended for personnel responsible for installing and programming STEP 7 programs and for service personnel Scope of this Manual This manual applies to version V5 x and higher of the NCM S7 configuration software and to version V5 x and higher of the STEP 7 software Notice If functions are described that require higher versions this is indicated by an additional icon Example ye wO aa Apart from various adaptations to the currently available devices the following We topics are also included e Additional information in the block description New blocks for user programs of the CP 443 1 FC53 AG_SSEND FC63 AG_SRECV With CPs of the S7 400 that support PROFINET communication in conjunction with CPUs as of version 5 1 data can be transmitted at a higher transmission rate using the FCs AG_SSEND and AG_SRECV Note You should also check the History for this manual in Appendix F Notice Please note that the availability of new functions depends on the device type you are using You can check which functions your module supports in the descri
117. T local 2001 PORT multicast group 2001 Ethernet station C UDP connection IP multicast group 224 0 1 0 PORT local 2001 PORT multicast group 2001 e ie Multicast group with e P address 224 0 1 0 e PORT address 2001 is Figure 5 23 Sending and Receiving in a Multicast Group using Identical PORT Addresses S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 A 145 5 Configuring Communication Connections IP Addresses for IP Multicast A 146 Possible Values IP addresses from 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 can be used for IP multicast Since the IP addresses up to 224 0 0 255 are reserved for special purposes we recommend that you use IP addresses starting at 224 0 1 0 default for IP multicast Identification of the Multicast Group A multicast group is not identified using the entire IP address the first addressed byte and the most significant bit of the second address byte are ignored This is an important feature that allows seemingly different IP addresses to address the same multicast group Example The following IP addresses address the same multicast group IP address Resulting multicast address 224 0 1 0 TT 0 1 0 225 0 1 0 SS _ lt lt 0 1 0 226 128 0 1000 0000 0 1 0 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Com
118. TCH WRITE connection 1 locked STATUS OUTPUT WORD see following Status code table For meaning refer to the table below Condition Codes The following table shows the STATUS code that must be evaluated by the user program Table 7 4 AG LOCK Condition Codes STATUS Meaning 7000n CP is not processing a job 70014 FETCH active 7002h WRITE active 81834 FETCH WRITE nor configured for this connection S7 400 only 8186H ID number not in permitted range e g 1 64 with S7 400 Industrial Ethernet CPs 80A4H The communication bus connection between the CPU and CP is not established Only with newer CPU versions 80B0n The module does not recognize the data record 80B14 The specified length in the LEN parameter is incorrect 80B2x The communication bus connection between the CPU and CP is not established 80C0n The data record cannot be read 80C1H The specified data record is currently being processed 80C2H There are too many jobs pending 80C3x CPU resources memory occupied S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 205 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC7 AG_LOCK continued Table 7 4 AG LOCK Condition Codes Fortsetzung STATUS Meaning 80C4n Communication error occurs temporarily and a repetition in the user program will often remedy the problem 80D2H Module start address in
119. TIC S7 devices during process control tasks These PCs equipped with runtime software are also known as runtime stations The PC station is configured in SIMATIC NCM PC STEP 7 for communication with SIMATIC S7 devices The required runtime software is available on the PC station after APC Advanced PC Configuration is installed PG operation A mode of the PROFIBUS Ethernet CP in which the SIMATIC S7 CPU is programmed configured or diagnosed over PROFIBUS Ethernet This mode is handled by the S7 functions PROFINET Standard of the PROFIBUS Users organization defining a heterogeneous communications and engineering model Protocol A set of rules for transferring data Using these rules both the formats of the frames and the data flow are specified Process image The process image is a special memory area in the programmable logic controller At the start of the cyclic program the signal states of the input modules are transferred to the process input image At the end of the cyclic program the process output image is transferred as a signal state to the output modules Segment Synonym for gt Bus segment Server A server is a device or in general terms an object that provides certain services A service is started at the instigation of a gt client Services services provided by a communication protocol S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 295 C79000 G8976 C182 08 D Gloss
120. TPE_SEL Switchover AUI ITP 8 Ground Ground 5 V 9 CLSN_N Collision 10 TRMT_N TPEXTXD_N Transmit TPE Transmit Data 11 Ground Ground 5 V 12 RCV_N TPERXD_N Receive TPE Receive Data 13 P15V 15 V 14 Ground Ground 5 V 15 The pin assignment complies with IEEE 802 3 AUI interface The signals TPETXD TPETXD_N and TPERXD TPERXD_N form the ITP interface A 4 Connector for PROFIBUS 9 pin D sub female connector for PROFIBUS used with IE PB Link Pin No Signal Name PROFIBUS Used in Designation RS485 1 PE Protective earth yes 2 k i 3 RxD TxD P Data line B yes 4 RTS AG Control A 5 M5V2 Data reference yes potential 6 P5V2 Power supply yes plus BATT RxD TxD N Data line A yes S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 282 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 B Standards and Approvals for SIMATIC NET S7 CPs B Standards and Approvals for SIMATIC NET S7 CPs Product Description CP 343 1 Lean CX00 CP 343 1 Lean CX10 CP 343 1 EX11 CP 343 1 EX20 CP 343 1 EX21 CP 343 1 EX30 CP 343 1 Advanced CP 343 1 IT CP 343 1 PN CP 443 1 EX11 CP 443 1 EX20 CP 443 1 IT CP 443 1 Advanced EX40 CP 443 1 Advanced EX41 IE PB Link IE PB Link PN IO IWLAN PB Link PN IO Note You will find the valid approvals on the type plate of the relevant product IEC 61131 2 Order no Order no Order no Order
121. UTER 4 4 IP address of default router 9 SUB LOC PORT 2 4 Local port 10 SUB REM PORT 2 4 Remote port also for E mail connections 11 SUB _LOC_TSAP TSAP length 4 Local TSAP S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 171 C79000 G8976 C182 08 6 Programmed Communication Connections Table 6 10 continued Subfield ID 1 12 SUB _REM_TSAP Subfield type Subfield length in bytes TSAP length 4 Meaning of the Parameter Remote TSAP 13 SUB EMAIL SENDER Length of the sender E mail address 4 E mail address of the sender 14 SUB DHCP_ENABLE 2 4 Obtain an IP address from a DHCP server e Possible values 0 no DHCP 1 DHCP optional 15 SUB CLIENT ID Length of the client ID 4 optional 18 SUB CONNECT NAME Length of the name 4 Name of the connection Possible values are a Z A Z 0 9 _ 19 SUB LOC MODE 1 4 Local mode of the connection e Possible values 0x00 SEND RECV 0x01 FTP protocol TCP connection only 0x10 S5 addressing mode for FETCH WRITE 0x80 FETCH 0X40 WRITE If you do not set the parameter the default setting is SEND RECV Note The specified codings can be can be combined by ORing them 20 SUB_REM MODE 1 4 Setting the mode on the communication partner not currently supported 21 SUB_KBUS_ADR KBUS address of the CPU Relevant o
122. UTPUT BOOL 0 All IOPS setto Auxiliary bit that indicates whether or not it is IOPS GOOD necessary to evaluate the IOPS status area 1 At least one IOPS set to BAD S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 A 241 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC 12 PNIO_RECV continued Decla ration OUTPUT ANY as VARTYPE only BYTE is permitted Possible Values The address of the data area points to one of the alternatives e Memory bit area Data block area Length For the maximum value refer to the device specific Part B of this manual in the Performance Data chapter This may differ for controller or device mode Remarks A status bit is transferred per byte of user data The length information depends on the length in the RECV parameter one bit per byte Length LEN 7 8 Controller mode Address gaps are also transferred according to the RECV parameter Address gaps are transferred with the status GOOD Device mode Address gaps are not transferred The block begins the transfer of the status for address 0 Note e The minimum length of the ANY pointer is length LEN 7 8 OUTPUT Note Additional Diagnostic Information In controller mode e 0 No alarm e gt 0 Number of pending alarms In device mode the parameter is
123. _LSEND FC53 AG_SSEND FC6 AG_RECV FC60 AG_LRECV FC63 AG_SRECV FCs for Access Coordination with FETCH WRITE POr AG LOCK 2h er eiete tedre ea e a e a ae desea FCS AG UNVOCK vesceseectucuncuseacmtattenemreu nee EP ETS FO 10 AG CNTRL enter ect eee ibe ne e ee e ee FB55 IP_CONFIG for Programmed Communication Connections FB88 PN_InOut FB90 PN_InOut_Fast blocks for PROFINET CBA FCs and FBs for PROFINET IlO ccc eee ee eee PG Die NO SEND ss scores fi ei aes EER ERR Seok eee es PO IZ PNIO RECOV acd pet ad teen rice dra toh latte dat p re General Response of the FCs for PROFINET IO Data GCOMSISIONGCY sererrree Go te tp snd eee ae ee dp OE ere a SUDSULUTE VANES orar onc ware ote e e5e eae are ow eens dace as Be PB 02 PNIORW REO lt cncches otdoackt thatcaettaktedewtiaanae FB 54 PNIO ALARM 25 ac canta at dtawta sud th deaeceheaweane as Configuration limits Resources Required by the FCs and FBs S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 Contents A 137 A 141 A 147 A 148 A 149 A 153 A 154 A 155 A 157 A 158 A 162 A 164 A 165 A 166 A 167 A 168 A 170 A 171 A 174 A 175 A 178 A 178 A 179 A 180 A 181 A 186 A 194 A 202 A 204 A 207 A 209 A 220 A 227 A 233 A 234 A 239 A 244 A 245 A 246 A 247 A 252 A 257 Contents 8 NCM S7 DIAGnOSuCS lt a iiswienevii
124. a Ethernet CPs in S7 Stations 1 7 4 Network Project Variant One Subnet More Than One Sub Project Configuration of the System In complex networked systems during configuration it is sometimes more efficient to manage plant sections in different Sub projects The situation can arise that communication takes place over an interproject subnet and that interproject connections must then also be created Example System section System section Production 2 Production 1 I I il il S7 400 1 S7 400 2 Ethernet 1 i S7 300 1 S7 300 2 S7 300 3 Organization in a Multiproject User friendly and consistent configuration of such communication is supported in By 9 STEP 7 as of Version V5 2 with the multiproject The functions for multiprojects in STEP 7 allow the following e Several projects can be managed in one multiproject and edited separately e Projects can be branched and merged Two different strategies can be distinguished in a multiproject e Several employees work at the same time on a multiproject in a networked environment The projects of the multiproject are in different network folders In this case all connection partners are available for configuring connections e One employee manages the multiproject centrally This person creates the structures for projects when necessary locally and contracts individual projects out for external editing The central configuration engineer then r
125. a transmission on connections AG_SEND AG _LSEND AG_SSEND for transferring the user data area to the Ethernet CP AG _RECV AG _LRECV AG_SRECV for entering data received from the Ethernet CP in the user data area 2 Evaluate the following bits in the FCs for AG_SEND AG_LSEND AG_SSEND the parameters DONE ERROR STATUS for AG_RECV AG_LRECV AG _LRECV the parameters NDR ERROR STATUS Notice Connection numbers IDs must be taken from the configuration when programming To ensure correct parameter settings for the block calls The LAD STL FBD editor in STEP 7 provides you with the option of accepting all the relevant parameters from the hardware configuration HW Config and from the connection configuration For more information refer to Section 7 2 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 87 C79000 G8976 C182 08 4 SEND RECEIVE Interface in the User Program Calling FCs in the CPU Program One possible sequence for FCs in conjunction with the organization and program blocks in the CPU cycle is illustrated in the following diagram Read PII Read in the received data of the e connection User program y AG_RECV Communication AG RECV Communication connection AGSED SEND gt AGy GGL lt Communication connection AG 4 LCE Transfer send data for the connection RESEND SS SEND Write PIQ Legend j Sequence of the CPU cycle Z7NN The
126. a utility model or design are reserved Siemens AG Automation and Drives Industrial Communication Postfach 4848 90327 Nurnberg Germany Disclaimer of Liability We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hardware and software described Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely we cannot guarantee full agreement However the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions Suggestions for improvement are welcomed Subject to technical change Siemens Aktiengesellschaft G79000 G8976 C182 08 This manual Supports you when commissioning your SIMATIC NET CP modules in an S7 station supports you so that your applications can communicate successfully and efficiently over the SIMATIC NET CPs In tandem with the Primer description provides you with all the information you require to implement your communications tasks Description Manual Primer Operating S7 CPs with e CP overviews Communication services e Network attachment e Configuration e Program interface x apes qm Learning from the plagnostics example Installation Part B commissioning ME e Characteristics e Operator controls displays e familiarization e testing interfaces e commissioning e Operating instructions e Technical specifications These two descriptions of your S7 CPs and NCM S7 are both on the
127. abel Figure 2 2 Example Front View of a CP 443 1 Advanced S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 47 C79000 G8976 C182 08 2 Characteristics of the Ethernet CPs 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 2 2 3 3 A 48 Slot Rules for SIMATIC S7 300 Permissible Slots In the SIMATIC S7 300 there is no set slot assignment for the SIMATIC NET CPs Slots 4 to 11 are permissible 1 2 and 3 cannot be used for CPs The SIMATIC NET CPs can be installed both in the central rack and in an expansion rack linked to the central rack via an IM 360 IM 361 K bus connection Number of SIMATIC NET CPs The number of SIMATIC NET CPs that can be operated is not limited by the system for example S7 300 CPU slot rules etc but by the application maximum cycle time of the application The following components must be added into the calculation of the cycle time on top of the existing S7 user program e Execution time of the FCs For communication between the S7 300 CPU and SIMATIC NET CPs blocks FCs FBs are necessary How often these blocks are called depends on the number of connections or the number of SIMATIC NET CPs Depending on the amount of data transmitted every block call extends the time required by the user program e Data conversion It may also be necessary for the information to be converted before transmission or after reception Please refer to the information in the relevant device
128. ablished again active or passive depending on the configuration An entry is also generated in the diagnostic buffer in which the job result can be found RESULT for CMD 4 Meaning Parameter Hex value range RESULT1 0000 00011 The reset job was transferred to the CP successfully The connection abort and subsequent connection establishment of all connections were triggered RESULT 1 0000 00021 The reset job could not be transferred to the CP because the service has not started on the CP for example CP in Stop RESULT2 0000 0000 Default CMD Meaning 5 CN _CLEAR_RESET Clear the reset ID This command resets the reset ID bit 15 in RESULT1 for the connection selected with ID The CP is selected in the LADDR parameter This job executes automatically when the connection status is read CMD 1 the separate job described here is therefore only required in special situations RESULT for CMD 5 Meaning Parameter Hex value range RESULT 1 0000 000114 The clear job was transferred to the CP successfully RESULT1 0000 00024 The clear job could not be transferred to the CP because the service has not started on the CP for example CP in Stop RESULT2 0000 0000 Default S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 218 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC10 AG_CNTRL
129. always 0 Parameter Expansion Note The ADD_INFO parameter is also updated when there are no INPUT addresses configured on the PROFINET IO controller In this case the PNIO_RECV block is called with a length LEN gt 0 for example LEN 1 byte It then transfers an address gap of 1 byte The parameter expansion can be used as of firmware V2 0 of the CP 343 1 In older firmware versions the parameter is reserved Remember that all output parameters may only be evaluated when the block signals either NDR 1 or ERROR 1 Condition Codes The following table shows the codes formed by the DONE ERROR and STATUS parameters that must be evaluated by the user program A 242 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC 12 PNIO_RECV continued Note For entries coded with 8Fxxy in STATUS refer to the information in the STEP 7 Standard and System Functions reference manual The chapter describing error evaluation with the RET VAL output parameter contains detailed information To find out which SFCs are used and are relevant for error evaluation display the properties dialog of the FC described here in the Calls tab Table 7 12 Condition Codes PNIO_RECV NDR ERROR STATUS Meaning 0 e Data acceptance active or e The CP is in STOP mode 1 0 0000n New data accepted without e
130. and manage the user software see 6 Configuring a CP involves the following steps the broken lines indicate options Create the Industrial Ethernet subnet see 3 3 1 Check or set the network properties Enter the Ethernet CP in the hardware configuration see 3 3 2 Attach the Ethernet CP to the Ethernet subnet see 3 3 2 Configuring communication connections Chap 5 S7 connections 6 Programming the ISO transport connections E ene eae SEND RECEIVE interface alternative see Section 4 ISO on TCP connections Program communication l TCP connections connections UDP see Chapter 6 Configuration data in User programs in the the STEP 7 project STEP 7 project Download the configuration to the PLC see 3 5 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 55 C79000 G8976 C182 08 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with 3 3 1 Creating an Industrial Ethernet Subnet Aims To be able to attach the SIMATIC stations to a subnet you create the subnet in your project This means that all the parameters for the entire subnet are managed centrally Procedure It is advisable to create the subnet before you configure the stations since the assignment of the SIMATIC stations is then performed largely automatically It is also possible to create the subnet at a later point in time when configuring a CP This is explained in more detail later in the chapter
131. ansferred in its entirety and is therefore consistent e Operation as PROFINET IO controller Regardless of this using the length information in the block call you can also read or output an input or output area smaller than the configured area consistently Note You should however bear in mind that in terms of the IO user data within a PROFINET IO system data consistency can only be guaranteed within the individual IO slots This applies regardless of the fact that consistent data transfer between CPU and IO controller is guaranteed for the blocks described here To guarantee data consistency you must however only access the IO data when the block has completed free of errors output parameter NDR TRUE You must also check that the IOCS or IOPS status for the data is GOOD S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 245 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs Example In a normal situation depending on the total length of the IO data the block will run over several user program cycles until the condition code DONE NDR 1 is signaled Call the PNIO_RECV block until NDR 1 Check the IOPS status of the received data from the PNIO devices and if necessary start error handling Edit and process data prepare new output data Call the PNIO_ SEND block until DONE 1 Check the IOCS status values received from the PNIO devices a
132. arameter Values FETCH request frame System ID Length of header ID OP code Length OP code OP code ORG field Length ORG field ORG ID DBNR Start address Length Empty field Length empty field E Linking to Other Systems with FETCH WRITE FETCH response frame High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte FFh 02 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 0 System ID 1 5 2 Length of header 16d 3 ID OP code 01 4 Length OP code 03 5 OP code 06 6 Ack field 0Fh 7 Length ack field 03 8 Error field No 9 Empty field FFh A Length empty field 07 B C D free E F Data up to 64 K but only if Error no 0 A 303 E Linking to Other Systems with FETCH WRITE Parameter Values S7 Address Area ORG ID O14 02 0314 044 Source dest Source dest Source dest Source dest data from to data from to data from to data from to data block in flag area process process main memory image ofthe image of the inputs PII outputs PIQ DBNR DB from irrelevant irrelevant irrelevant which the source data are taken or to which the dest data are transferred permitted range 1 255 Start address DW number Flag byte no Input byte no Output
133. arameters for Internetworking Attachment on Destination Station MPI Node Address MPI address of the CP if this has its own MPI address Otherwise specify the MPI address of the CPU Location of the Module Rack Slot Rack slot no of the CP to be checked If you specify the MPI address of the CP you can simply use the default setting 0 0 With this setting the CP whose address was specified as the node address is accessed PROFIBUS PROFIBUS address of the PROFIBUS CP via which the S7 station is reached Rack slot no of the CP to be checked Industrial Ethernet MAC address of the Ethernet CP via which the S7 station is reached Entered in hexadecimal Rack slot no of the CP to be checked If you specify 0 0 the CP specified with the node address is accessed directly Industrial Ethernet IP address of the Industrial Ethernet Rack slot no of the CP to be TCP IP CP via which the S7 station is checked reached If you specify 0 0 the CP specified Entered in decimal with the node address is accessed Example directly IP address decimal 142 120 9 134 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 266 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 8 NCM S7 Diagnostics Examples of an Online Path without Gateway Rack slot 0 4 Node address MAC 08 00 06 01 02 03 Attachment of target station Industrial Ethernet
134. ary SIMATIC NET Siemens SIMATIC Network and Communication Product name for gt networks and network components from Siemens previously SINEC SIMATIC NET Ind Ethernet SIMATIC NET LAN system for industrial applications based on Ethernet previously SINEC H1 SIMATIC NCM PC SIMATIC NCM PC allows STEP 7 compatible configuration for SIMATIC NET PC components and replaces the previous PC configuration tools COML S7 and COM PROFIBUS PC Edition By sharing a common database with STEP 7 fully integrated configuration including all protocols is ensured SINEC Previous product name for gt networks and network components from Siemens Now SIMATIC NET Station A station is identified by a e MAC address in the Ethernet network e PROFIBUS address in the PROFIBUS network Subnet A subnet is part of a gt network whose parameters for example gt PROFIBUS must be matched The subnet includes bus components and all the attached stations Subnets can for example be connected together by gt gateways to form a network A gt system consists of several subnets with unique gt subnet numbers A subnet consists of several gt stations with unique gt PROFIBUS or MAC addresses Industrial Ethernet System This means all the electrical equipment within a system A system includes among other things programmable logic controllers devices for operation and monitoring bus systems field devices actuators supply lines S7 CPs
135. at the module automatically uses the factory set address If you want to use ISO services we recommend that you enter the address printed on the module in the configuration S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 60 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with Note The IP address and Subnet mask input fields have no significance for ISO transport option IP protocol being used 3 Select the required subnet type in the Subnet list box 4 You can display the properties dialog box for the selected subnet by clicking the Properties button 5 Enter information specific to the subnet node in the General tab 6 You must finally confirm your input with OK otherwise the networking is not entered refer to Point 3 Result The CP is now configured as a network node for the corresponding S7 station Setting Addresses in the Configuration and Addressing for the First Time The address settings described here are made on the CP only after you download the configuration data With the latest Ethernet CPs the situation is as follows To be able to reach the CP using these addresses before you download the configuration data you can address the CP using its default MAC address and then supply it with project specific address information This procedure of assigning an address the first time is described in Section 3 4 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethern
136. ation v Further information is available from the following sources Information about the communication services is available in the appropriate chapters in this manual When you are working with the diagnostic tool the integrated help system provides you with context related support You will find detailed information on working with STEP 7 programs in the Help on STEP 7 which includes the topic Diagnosing Hardware S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 A 259 8 NCM S7 Diagnostics 8 2 Functions of NCM 7 Diagnostics Functions The diagnostic functions can be grouped as follows e General diagnostic and statistical functions e Type and mode dependent diagnostic functions General diagnostic and statistical functions Regardless of the configured mode of the Ethernet CP the following diagnostic functions are possible e Querying the operating mode on Ethernet e Querying the event messages recorded on the Ethernet CP diagnostic buffer Mode Dependent Functions Depending on the configured mode of the Ethernet CP the following diagnostic functions are possible e Diagnostics of ISO transport connections e Diagnostics of ISO on TCP connections e Diagnostics of TCP connections e Diagnostics of UDP connections e Diagnostics of E mail connections e Diagnostics of TCP connections for PROF Inet S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Co
137. below in Section 6 6 The parameters SUB_IP_ V4 and SUB DNS NAMEare mutually exclusive one or the other must be specified Note Mail server ports are well known ports and do not need to be specified S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 A 169 6 Programmed Communication Connections 6 5 5 Parameter field for FTP connection Meaning To handle an FTP job sequence between the S7 station as FTP client and an FTP server the IT CP must set up a connection to the S7 CPU This connection is known in this context as an FTP connection FTP connections are TCP connections with the parameter SUB LOC MODE set to the FTP mode You will find a detailed description of how to use the FTP function with IT CPs in 5 Structure ID connection ID A Freely assignable connection reference NO Or SpE must be specified in the FC FTP_ Subfield 1 Range of values for the connection ID Type 1 Identifier for the connection type Subfield 2 e 7 400 1 2 through 64 e 7 300 1 2 through 16 Subfield n Usable Subfields Table 6 9 Subfield Parameter ID Type Special Features Notes Use Please refer also to the general mandatory description in Table 6 10 Page A 171 optional 18 SUB_ CONNECT NAME O 19 SUB LOC MODE here 0x01 FTP protocol m 21 SUB KBUS ADR This value is always set to O for CPs for the m for S7 300 and d
138. bled in the accessed rack 0 Address of the parameter to be written is disabled in the accessed rack 0 Internal error e g illegal ANY reference 0 Module with this address does not exist 0 ee Negative acknowledgment reading from the module 0 80A1h Negative acknowledgment writing to the module 0 The module does not recognize the data record O 1 80B1H e The specified data record length is wrong or e The CP changes to STOP 0 The data record cannot be read 0 The specified data record is currently being processed 0 1 80C2H There are too many jobs pending 0 Resources occupied memory 0 1 80C4n Communication error occurs temporarily and a repetition in the user program will often remedy the problem 7 8 3 General Response of the FCs for PROFINET IO IO Consumer Status IOCS and IO Provider Status IOPS The two communication partners CPU CP on the one hand and IO device on the other both have status information for the data GOOD or BAD This status information is transferred parallel to the data The status of the partner that sends the data is called IOPS lO Provider Status the status of the receiving partner is called IOCS IO Consumer Status The IOPS and IOCS status are not necessarily identical It is for example possible that the S7 300 CPU is in STOP mode output disable or no PROFINET IO blocks active In this case the CP as PROFINET IO controller transfers the BAD status to the IO devices S7 CP
139. bout how the data blocks used in the S7 station for file transfer are mapped to files from a file allocation table file file db txt You can create the file allocation table as follows and transfer it to the CP e By entering it in the FTP folder described here The file allocation table is then downloaded to the CP automatically along with the project engineering data e By creating a file db txt file directly You must then download the file allocation table created in this way to the CP The file allocation table file_db txt is stored in the file system of the Ethernet CP in the config folder PROFINET tab Here you specify the properties of the Ethernet CP for PROFINET IO and PROFINET CBA S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 72 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with Table 3 3 Options Input Areas in the PROFINET Tab Option Input Area e Mode Meaning Effect Depending on the type of CP device you can select the possible modes here in which the S7 station can be operated on PROFINET e PROFINET IO Controller With this option you decide whether or not the Ethernet CP is operated as a PROFINET IO controller You can also make this setting by assigning a PROFINET IO system to the CP in HW Config using the context menu e PROFINET IO device With this option you decide whether or not the Ethernet CP is operated as a PROFINET IO dev
140. c in hardware configuration RECV P M 0 0 BYTE 100 Buffer for received data NDR DB 110 DBX 0 6 Received code ERROR DB 110 DBX 0 7 Exrror code STATUS DB 110 DBW 2 Status code LEN DB 110 DBW 4 Received data length S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 194 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC6 AG_RECV FC60 AG_LRECV FC63 AG_SRECV continued Notice Please note the following special feature on TCP connections With the older S7 CPs for S7 300 you must use FC AG_LRECV on TCP connections With the latest S7 CPs for S7 300 you must also use FC AG_RECV for TCP connections Note If you want to use FC63 AG_SRECV you will need to select the SPEED SEND RECV mode in the Options tab of the properties dialog for the configured connection in STEP 7 NetPro How the Block Works The following diagram illustrates the normal sequence of data acceptance triggered by an AG_RECV in the user program Each AG_RECV job in the user program is acknowledged by the Ethernet CP with an entry in the output parameters NDR ERROR and STATUS The way in which the FC functions depends on the CP type you are using e Case a Sequence with older CP types With older CP types the transfer of the entire data area regardless of its length is started after the first block call by the CP f e Case b Sequence wit
141. c function you selected in the navigation area Operation e By selecting a diagnostic object in the navigation area with the mouse you execute the diagnostic function e Using the menu bar and toolbar you control the sequence of the diagnostics with context sensitive menu commands S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 262 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C 182 08 8 2 2 Overview 8 NCM S7 Diagnostics General Menu Commands When running diagnostic functions the following menu commands have general significance Depending on the context other functions may be available for more detailed information refer to the online help for NCM Diagnostics Table 8 1 Meaning of the Menu Commands Menu Diagnostics gt Open Online Connection Diagnostics gt Close Online Connection Meaning With this menu command you can establish a connection to a different CP you want to check without having to quit and restart the diagnostic tool The current diagnostic connection is closed If you want to use more than one diagnostic connection at the same time you can start NCM S7 diagnostics more than once Operating Mode gt Stop a module Start a module Reset module memory Resetting to factory settings Format the C PLUG for this module You can control the CP as follows Stops the CP Starts the CP if the RUN STOP switch is set to RUN With certain CP types for exam
142. cast A 143 unspecified ISO on TCP connection A 124 unspecified TCP connection A 132 unspecified UDP connection A 140 Approval CSA A 286 FM A 287 IEC 61131 2 A 283 standards and approvals A 283 UL A 286 AS interface A 16 Block library A 228 Block PN_InOut FB88 formal parameters A 228 status codes A 229 Block PNIn _SEND FC11 formal parameters A 234 Block PNIO_ALARM FB54 formal parameters A 253 Block PNIO_RECV FC12 formal parameters A 240 Block PNIO_RW_REC FB52 formal parameters A 248 Broadcast with UDP A 141 C CE Mark A 284 Commissioning A 53 Communication IT A 20 PG OP A 20 PROFINET A 20 S5 compatible A 20 S7 A 20 Communication options A 17 Communication services configuring A 77 CONF_DB A 221 Siehe auch configuration data block Configuration data download to target system A 82 Configuration data block A 155 A 158 Connection properties A 98 Connection configuration A 96 Connection ID A 164 range of values A 164 Connection types parameter fields for A 164 Connector for Industrial Ethernet Pinning 15 Pin Sub D Female Connector A 282 Connector for PROFIBUS 9 pin D sub female connector A 282 CP address A 175 CP project engineering data saving A 83 Creating a subnet A 56 CSA approval A 286 CSMA CD A 16 D DHCP server A 70 Diagnostics Siehe NCM S7 Diagnostics Displaying network attachments A 62 Downloading A 82 Dynamic prope
143. cation connection receive es a send Ethernet node send Cl gt gt receive Communication l onnection receive N send Figure 5 2 Sending and Receiving via one Communication Connection S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 98 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 Note The term connection is also used here for UDP Reason During configuration just as in TCP the communication partners are assigned to each other and therefore logically connected In actual fact with UDP there is no explicit connection establishment between communication partners Amounts of Data 5 Configuring Communication Connections Refer to the manual 2 supplied with the Ethernet CP for the number of communication connections supported by the Ethernet CP The number of connections per station can be increased by adding more CPs The Ethernet CP can transfer the amounts of data shown in the table below per job on one connection Table 5 1 ISO Transport ISO on TCP TCP UDP Sending 8192 bytes 8192 bytes 8192 bytes 2048 bytes Receiving 8192 bytes 8192 bytes 8192 bytes 2048 bytes Notice The transfer of more than 240 bytes of data is supported by the current CPs Older version CPs support data transfer with a data length of up to 240 bytes Please note the information in Section 7 and in the manual of the Ethernet CP S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configu
144. contained on your module If you are in any doubt contact your local Siemens advisor r Caution Remember that interrupting the download can lead to an inconsistent state on the module For more information read the description of the relevant device in Part B of this manual For more detailed information on the various load options refer to the integrated help S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 280 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 A Pinout A 1 24 V DC Connector Terminal Function L 24 V M Ground A 2 RJ 45 Jack for Twisted Pair Ethernet CPs with One Connector Pin No Signal Name 1 TD 2 TD_N 3 RD 4 5 6 RD_N 7 8 Function TP Transmit TP Transmit TP Receive TP Receive The pinning of the RJ 45 jack corresponds to the IEEE802 3 twisted pair interface CPs with Multiport Switch Pin No Signal Name 1 RD 2 RD_N 3 TD 4 5 6 TD_N 7 8 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 Function TP Receive TP Receive TP Transmit TP Transmit A 281 A Pinout A 3 Connector for Industrial Ethernet Pinning 15 Pin Sub D Female Connector Pin No Signal Name Function 1 MEXT External ground shield 2 CLSN Collision 3 TRMT TPETXD Transmit TPE Transmit Data 4 Ground Ground 5 V 5 RCV TPERXD Receive TPE Receive Data 6 M15V Ground 15 V 7
145. correct S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 206 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs 7 4 2 FC8 AG _UNLOCK Meaning of the Block Using the AG_UNLOCK function the external access to system areas on the S7 CPU with FETCH or WRITE on the connection specified by the ID parameter is released The next external FETCH WRITE job to arrive for the CP can then be processed The AG_UNLOCK follows an access lock with AG_LOCK Call Call interface in FBD representation AG UNLOCK STATUS Example in STL representation STL Explanation call fc 8 Block call ID DB 100 DBW 2 Connection ID acc to configuration LADDR W 16 0100 LADDR 256 dec in hardware configuration STATUS DB 100 DBW 4 Status code How the Block Works To release the connection again the LOCK request bit must be cleared by the FC again The FC also shows the current status using error messages Explanation of the Formal Parameters The following table explains all the formal parameters for the AG_UNLOCK function S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 207 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC8 AG_ UNLOCK continued Parameter Declara Possible Remarks tion Values ID INPUT INT 1 2 16 for The connection number of the connection is 7 300
146. cted to a common transmission medium Industrial Ethernet Media Access Control MAC Mechanisms for controlling access by a station to a common transmission medium shared with other stations RFC1006 see ISO on TCP S5S5 connection see ISO transport connection Subnet mask The subnet mask specifies which parts of an IP address are assigned to the network number The bits in the IP address whose corresponding bits in the subnet mask have the value 1 are assigned to the network number Subnet number A gt system consists of several gt subnets with unique subnet numbers TCP IP TCP Transport Connection Protocol IP Internet Protocol UDP User Datagram Protocol User Datagram Protocol datagram service for simple internetwork transmission without acknowledgment S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 299 C79000 G8976 C182 08 D Glossary D 3 PROFINET Component based Automation Concept for implementing modular distributed automation applications on the basis of open standards and data communication Component based Automation is an expansion of Totally Integrated Automation TIA Device In PROFINET CBA part of the PROFINET component that contains the hardware specific data of the PROFINET component In SIMATIC iMap a device is the software representation of the physical device for which the PROFINET component was created It is displayed in the network view of SIMATIC iMa
147. d 5 6 2 Specifying TCP Addresses Address Parameters and Connection Types With TCP the communication partners are addressed by the local and remote endpoints as follows e Local addresses Local IP address and local port e Remote addresses Remote IP address and remote port Ethernet station A E Ethernet station B remote connection remote C e _ MAC address A Figure 5 15 Sending and Receiving on One TCP Connection Depending on the required connection type the remote address parameters are either specified or left open during configuration e Specified TCP connection You specified a destination station when you created the connection e Unspecified TCP connection You entered unspecified for the connection partner when you created the connection S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 129 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections Addresses Tab Specified TCP Connection The addresses tab displays proposed values for the relevant local and remote address information You can change the port settings individually Properties TCP Connection x General Addresses Options Overview Status Information The ports are valid in the range from 1 to 65535 A value higher than 1024 ts recommended since the well known ports are located in the range up to 1024 Local Remote IF dec 140 680 0 2 i 40 60
148. d in Section 3 3 2 Tabs General Addresses Options Loco Loco es es Loco Loro Time of day synchronization Ll User r a Symbols DNS parameters ______ amp Diagnostics Addressing _ gt Loco IP Access ProtectioaA gt IP Configuration Port Parameters FTP PROFINET ee r A 64 Settings for Interface Interface parameters for the user program Time of day synchronization Data transfer Replace module without PG Ethernet profile for fault tolerant connections Individual network settings Send keepalives for connections Multiplex OP connections reserve internal CPU connection resources SIMATIC mode NTP mode NTP Network Time Protocol Specify user permissions for IT functions Symbolic access to variables using IT functions Specify the address for the domain name server for E mail services Call NCM diagnostics special diagnostics module diagnostics Select the station to initialize Assign configured IP parameters Edit the IP access list Set the IP address Individual network settings Create modify file allocation table Specify properties for PROFINET IO and PROFINET CBA S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with help The functions are explained in detail there E Please read
149. d in project engineering with NCM S7 Commissioning PC This is available on the Web at Stations http support automation siemens com WW view en 13542666 Manual and Quick Start Configuring and You will find the Web addresses of the current documents of this manual at the Commissioning S7 CPs address shown below for the Version History for PROFIBUS Manual NCM S7 for This is available on the Web at PROFIBUS FMS http support automation siemens com WW view en 1158418 Document is not part of the manual package CP Documentation in the Manual Collection Order no A5EQ0069051 tien The SIMATIC NET Manual Collection ships with each S7 CP This DVD is ote updated at regular intervals this means that the DVD contains the latest device E manuals and descriptions available at the time the DVD was written pa Version History Current Downloads for the SIMATIC NET S7 CPs In the Version History Current Downloads for the SIMATIC NET S7 CPs you will find information on all previously available CPs for SIMATIC S7 Ind Ethernet PROFIBUS and IE PB Link You will find the latest release of these documents at http support automation siemens com WW view en9836605 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 8 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 This manual Information on the Current Block Versions FCs FBs Please use the latest block versions for new user programs
150. detailed sample programs for the SEND RECEIVE interface on the Web You will also find the link in Section 7 e Expanded sample of programmed communication connections in Section 6 e Printed version General Part A and Device Description Part B separate Due to the increasing size the printed version has been divided into two volumes New in release 01 STEP 7 V5 3 SPO C79000 G8976 C 182 01 e New structure of the manual In this release we have put together the previously separate manuals NCM S7 and S7 CPs in one manual This also takes into account that the NCM S7 configuration tool is no longer installed separately for PROFIBUS and Industrial Ethernet The functions of NCM 7 are now installed automatically when STEP 7 is installed e Range of devices described S7 CPs and gateways The devices described in detail in Part B now include not only the CPs for SIMATIC S7 but also the gateway IE PB Link This step was taken in particular due to the special significance for PROFINET applications New in release 07 STEP 7 V5 2 SP1 C79000 G8976 C129 07 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 307 C79000 G8976 C182 08 F Document History Note This is the last release before the two manuals NCM S7 for Ind Ethernet and Device Manual S7 CPs for Ind Ethernet were merged This manual also includes specially marked passages that apply specifically to and require version 5 2 S
151. different shading shows which connections and FC blocks belong together Figure 4 2 Typical Sequence of Function Calls in the CPU Cycle The following points are illustrated by the diagram The user program consisting of any number of blocks OBs FBs or FCs gt see also 6 accesses several connections Figure 4 2 illustrates three connections S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 88 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 4 SEND RECEIVE Interface in the User Program e At various points event and program controlled the user program sends data on a connection using the AG_SEND call e At various points in the CPU cycle the user program accepts the data received on the connection using an AG_RECV call Note The blocks can also be called more than once in a cycle for the same communication connection S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 89 C79000 G8976 C182 08 4 SEND RECEIVE Interface in the User Program 4 3 Data Exchange S7 CPU lt gt Ethernet CP The Ethernet CP processes the send and receive jobs independent of the CPU cycle and requires one transmission time The interface to the user program with the FCs is synchronized by an acknowledgment Two situations must be distinguished e The CPU cycle is faster than the transmission time e The CPU cycle is slower than the transmission time Note Please refer to the sequence charts for th
152. e with PC stations multiple applications the CPU application that is the endpoint of the particular connection is specified here R S or via CP With S7 CPs Rack slot of the local CP via which the connection is established With PC stations Display of the CP over which the connection is maintained Partner address Specifies the remote IP address of the connection Local port Local port 8 characters default length Remote port Remote port 8 characters default width Mode Displays the mode configured in the Options tab Status Indicates the current configuration of the connection Connections without assignment are indicated by No local CP No remote CP in the status column and a character at the end of the Local ID for example 0002 A000 Connections you are currently editing are also indicated by at the end of the local ID Connection Overview with Multiple CPUs in an S7 Station If you operate more than one CPU in your S7 station you can click the button to extend the overview to the connections on all CPUs S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 133 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections 5 7 Configuring UDP Connection Properties Introduction When you create a connection in the New dialog you specify the connection type and as far as possible the connection partner When necessary you can adap
153. e FCs in Chapter 7 These charts show how to handle the SEND RECEIVE interface in the user program for problem free data exchange Remember the points below about the CPU cycle and transmission time FC Calls Faster than the Transmission Time A 90 If a block is called again in the user program before data were transferred or received the procedure is as follows on the interface of the FCs e AG _SEND AG_LSEND AG_SSEND No further job is accepted until the transmission of the data on the connection has been acknowledged by the Ethernet station During this time the user program receives the message job active until the Ethernet CP can accept the next job on the same connection e AG RECV AG_LRECV The job is acknowledged with the message no data available yet if there are no received data on the Ethernet CP The user program receives this message in the CPU cycle until the Ethernet CP has received data again on the connection S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 4 SEND RECEIVE Interface in the User Program FC Calls Slower than the Transmission Time If a block is called again before the data were completely transferred or received the procedure is as follows on the interface of the FC blocks e AG _SEND AG_LSEND AG_SSEND The job is positively acknowledged The Ethernet CP is ready to receive a new send job at the earliest however with the next call
154. e objects S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 83 C79000 G8976 C182 08 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with Relocating the CP in the Hardware Configuration If you are using communication services with configured connections the connection IDs also identify the slot of the CP If you drag a CP you have already configured to a different slot note the following Notice If you drag the CP to a different slot the data of the connection configuration are automatically updated The data of the connection configuration must however be downloaded again S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 84 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 4 SEND RECEIVE Interface in the User Program This chapter explains the following e How to send and receive data e Which data areas can be used on the S7 CPU e How to program the SEND RECEIVE interface in the user program W You will find further information in the following sources e For programming and configuring nodes for connections for example a SIMATIC S5 PLC with the CP 1430 TCP PC with CP 1613 please refer to the appropriate manuals e The FCs for programming connections are described in Section 7 3 e Configuring the Ethernet CP with NCM S7 is described in Chapter 5 e Programming communication connections over the interface in the user program is described in Chapter 6 Sample programs Sample confi
155. e sender receives a return value on the SEND RECEIVE interface TCP connection When using the SEND RECEIVE interface on TCP connections the Ethernet CP supports the socket interface for example Winsock dll to TCP IP found on almost every system PC or other system TCP is intended for reliable internetwork data transmission The TCP service complies with the TCP IP standard Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol see 18 UDP connection UDP is intended for simple internetwork data transmission without confirmation If the connection is suitably configured broadcast and multicast frames can also be sent on UDP connections To avoid overload due to high broadcast load the CP does not allow reception of UDP broadcasts As an alternative use the multicast function over a UDP connection This allows you to register the CP as a node in a multicast group SEND RECEIVE interface Data transfer is triggered by the user program The interface to the user program in the SIMATIC S7 is formed by special SIMATIC S7 blocks of the type FC functions A 32 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 1 Communication via Ethernet CPs in S7 Stations Stations The SEND RECEIVE interface allows program controlled communication on Industrial Ethernet between the SIMATIC S7 PLC and the following e SIMATIC S7 PLC with Ethernet CP e SIMATIC S5 PLC with Ethernet CP e P
156. e start address When you configure the CP with STEP 7 hardware configuration the module start address is displayed in the configuration table Specify this address here CMD INPUT INT see Table 7 7 OUTPUT 0 Job still being processed or not yet triggered 1 Job executed S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 Command to FC AG_CNTRL This parameter indicates whether or not the job was completed without errors For the meaning of this parameter in conjunction with the ERROR and STATUS parameters refer to the following table Note If DONE 1 RESULT can be evaluated A 211 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC10 AG_CNTRL Continued Declara Possible Meaning Remark tion Values ERROR OUTPUT BOOL 0 No error Error code 1 Error For the meaning of this parameter in conjunction with the DONE and STATUS parameters refer to the following table 7 6 STATUS OUTPUT WORD See Table 7 6 Status code For the meaning of this parameter in conjunction with the DONE and ERROR parameters refer to the following table 7 6 RESULT1 OUTPUT DWORD See Table 7 7 Information returned according to the command sent to FC AG_CNTRL RESULT2 OUTPUT DWORD See Table 7 7 Only to be evaluated for S7 400 Part 2 of information returned according to the command sent to FC AG_CNTRL Condition C
157. e used as a basis to illustrate how real configurations can be created in STEP 7 projects S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 36 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 1 Communication via Ethernet CPs in S7 Stations 1 7 1 Network Project Variant One Subnet One Project Configuration of the System In the simplest case your system consists of SIMATIC S7 stations connected by one subnet for example of the type Industrial Ethernet S7 400 1 s M am Ethernet 1 A S7 300 2 View in a STEP 7 Project You create an Industrial Ethernet object in the STEP 7 project Stations created in the same project refer to this object as soon as they are configured as network nodes KA SIMATIC Manager Fertigung lt Offline gt Projekt G A GDES Ep Datei Bearbeiten Eintugen lelevstem Ansicht Extras Fenster Hilfe E E E Fertigung H 37 4001 ai E 57 3001 57 4001 57 300 57 300 2 MPI Metz 1 S7 a00 2 H a Metz Bearbeiten Einf gen Zielystem Ansicht Estras Fenster Hilfe _ o x Ethernet 1 57 4001 S7 300 1 CPU CP CPUICP 414 45 th 313 345 o Oo m Ethernet 1 Industrial Ethernet of S00 2 CPUICP ai 313 345 o E 2 Y ut Drucken Ste F1 um Hilfe zu erhalten E E L IMMM n EE ee S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 37 C79000 G8976 C182 08 1 Communication via Ethe
158. ea error writing a parameter Alignment error reading a parameter Alignment error writing a parameter Parameter is in the write protected first active data block Parameter is in the write protected second active data block Parameter contains a DB number that is too high Destination area not loaded DB Timeout reading a parameter from the I O area 8F43H Timeout writing a parameter to the I O area Ol OIOIOIOI OIOI OLJ OI 0 0 0 OO OILO 8F45xH Address of the parameter to be written is disabled in the accessed rack 8F44H Address of the parameter to be read is disabled in the accessed rack Internal error e g illegal ANY reference Module with this address does not exist Negative acknowledgment reading from the module S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 255 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs Table 7 14 Condition Codes PNIO_ALARM DONE oO CO O O O NEW ERROR STATUS Meaning Negative acknowledgment writing to the module Module does not recognize the data record The specified data record length is wrong or e The CP changes to STOP The data record cannot be read The specified data record is currently being processed There are too many jobs pending Resources occupied memory
159. ease 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 A 105 5 Configuring Communication Connections 5 3 3 Further Functions Toolbar In the toolbar of the connection configuration dialog the following functions are available 9 Save To save the configured connection select the Save function or click the save m button Print You can print the entire connection table or individual sections of it by selecting the Print function or clicking the print button The following print options are available e Overview of all connections complete connection table e Overview of the selected connections selected area e Detailed printout of all connections details of all connections e Detailed printout of the selected connections details of the selected area Change Connection Partners cA You assign a new partner station to the selected connection Important Remember that this also changes the partner ID on connections of the SEND RECEIVE interface You may need to adapt your user program Insert Connection KA You create a new entry in the connection table Download Ea You download the connection table to the PLC For more detailed information call up the integrated help function Help WV I If you require help or more information select the Help function or click the help button The help button provides you with context related help Using the help function you call a help dialog familia
160. ecord INPUT parameter only length of the data record to be written is entered here by the user The length must match the definition of the data record RECORD IN OUT ANY as The address of the data e Read data record VARTYPE area points to one of the OUTPUT parameter only after a BYTE alternatives successful read the data of the WORD e Memory bit area data record is stored here If the and s iDsia iegeares length of the ANY pointer is too DWORD low as much data as possible is are The length of the any transferred permitted pointer must be greater WS dalarecerd than or equal to the definition of the data record INPUT parameter only the data to be written from the data record is stored here by the user The length of the ANY pointer must be at least as long as specified by the LEN parameter Condition Codes The following table shows the condition codes formed by the DONE ERROR and STATUS parameters that must be evaluated by the user program Note For entries with the coding 8Fxx note the information under STATUS in the Reference Manual STEP 7 System and Standard Functions for S7 300 and S7 400 The chapter describing error evaluation with the RET VAL output parameter contains detailed information S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 A 249 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs Table 7 13
161. ect functionality allows you to create a connection to a partner in an unknown project In this case you can specify a connection name as a reference in the properties dialog of the connection When the projects are merged STEP 7 then supports you with automatic synchronization of the separately configured connections The connection remains unspecified until the projects have been merged and the connections synchronized Only following this synchronization can the configuration data be downloaded to the local station without inconsistencies You should therefore use this variant when you know that the projects will be merged in a multiproject Specified connections with representative objects To allow you to create specified connections to stations in a different project for example production 2 or that are not managed with STEP 7 you can configure these stations as other stations example in the project production 1 This allows you to create consistent fully specified configuration data and to download it to the local station It is also possible to create specified connections between these stations in different independent projects The stations can then communicate immediately over the created connections after the configuration data have been downloaded Use this variant when you want to operate projects separately due to the complexity Stations of the type SIMATIC S5 function in just the same way as representative objects
162. ecting Help gt Contents e You will find examples of configurations in the Primer S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 52 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with 3 1 How to Commission an Ethernet CP The essential steps in commissioning an Ethernet CP are shown in the following overview Notice The chart below shows the basic steps Please read the device specific instructions in Installation and Commissioning in the description of your CP Manual Part B Installation and Commissioning Configuring Programming STEP 7 p se Install the CP on the S7 standard rail S7 300 or in the S7 rack S7 400 Install the STEP 7 configuration software on a PG PC Connect the power supply Configure the Ethernet CP e by configuring in the project engineering see Section 3 3 Connect the CP to Industrial Ethernet al e by programming see Section6 Turn on the S7 station Download the configuration data and the user programs to the S7 station and or CP Use the diagnostic functions during commissioning and to analyze problems S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 53 C79000 G8976 C182 08 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with 3 2 General Information on STEP 7 NCM S7 Installation The functions of NCM S7 are available automatically immediately after installing STEP 7 Functions NCM S7 consi
163. ecting Operator Interface Devices via Industrial ENEE eetere casey ate oles 4c te tee ere meeare ate eae Ace Beate ae S7 Communication on Industrial Ethernet 0005 S5 compatible Communication SEND RECEIVE Interface FETCH WRITE Services Server 0 00 cece eee ee eens Networking Stations with STEP 7 0c cee Network Project Variant One Subnet One Project Network Project Variant SIMATIC S5 and Non SIMATIC Devices on TAC OUDRICLe ea fist jb ects Soke eB 2 ono Bs AROS o woes aurea eee ee A Network Project Variant Two or More Subnets One Project Network Project Variant One Subnet More Than One Sub Project Network Project Variant Several Subnets in Several Sub Projects Network Project Variant Connections between Subnets TCP IP 2 Characteristics of the Ethernet CPS 0 0 cece eee ees 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 2 2 3 3 2 3 4 2 3 5 2 4 2 4 1 2 4 2 2 4 3 2 4 4 2 4 5 Communications Processors for S7 300 000 eee Communications Processors for S7 400 00e cee Slot Rules for SIMATIC 87 300 0 cee Permissible SlotS eco ete eee ew dak w anda a eMeeee aie eet Number of SIMATIC NET CPs 0 0 cee ees MUMICOMPULIN G i 24b oatte onc t oes oaks Fetus eee mew haute eeda Removing Inserting Replacing Modules 0008 Note on the S7 300 CPU Connection Resources
164. ections can then be joined up based on this reference As soon as the connections have been joined the connection name reference is no longer relevant and is no longer displayed A 112 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections 5 4 2 Specifying ISO Transport Addresses Address Parameters An ISO transport connection is specified by the local and remote connection endpoint e Local addresses Local MAC address and local TSAP Transport Service Access Point e Remote addresses Remote MAC address and remote TSAP Ethernet station A 7 Ethernet station B Remote re TSAP ISO transport ISAP Local connection Semote TSAP jm lt i TSAP MAC MAC address A address B Figure 5 6 Sending and Receiving on One ISO Transport Connection Notice The TSAPs of an ISO transport connection must match as follows Remote TSAP on Ethernet CP local TSAP in destination station Local TSAP on Ethernet CP remote TSAP in destination station S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 113 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections Addresses Tab The addresses tab displays proposed values for the relevant local and remote address information When connecting to non S7 stations you can set the TSAP addresses individually Proper
165. ed by the Ethernet CP The number of connections per station can be increased by adding more CPs Up to 2042 bytes of user data can be transferred per job buffer The job header uses an additional 6 bytes A 148 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections 5 8 FETCH WRITE Mode FETCH WRITE The FETCH WRITE services allow direct access to the system memory areas on the SIMATIC S7 CPU from SIMATIC S5 SIMATIC PC stations or from devices of other ranges e FETCH Read data directly e WRITE Write data directly Connection Types The FETCH WRITE services can be configured and used in SIMATIC S7 on the following connection types e ISO transport connections e SO on TCP connections e TCP connections Configuration Depending on the station type the following modes can be configured for the connection endpoint e SIMATIC S7 Station FETCH PASSIVE WRITE PASSIVE If you select the FETCH PASSIVE or WRITE PASSIVE mode for the ISO transport connection you can access the system areas on a SIMATIC S7 PLC from a SIMATIC S5 station or other non S7 station unspecified connection S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 149 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections Properties 150 Transport Connection General Addresses Dynamics Options Oyvervieny Stat
166. een the CPU and CP As a result other types of communication such as PG functions cannot be executed or only very slowly HMI systems access data of the CPU too often using S7 functions This slows down communication generally and there may be a lack of resources when SEND RECEIVE FCs are called cyclically in OB1 The recommendations below will help to avoid these situations Do not call communication blocks cyclically in OB1 Communication should be called time controlled in a suitable cyclic interrupt OB The call interval of this OB should be significantly higher than the average cycle time of your program You should set a minimum cycle time that is higher than the average runtime of OB1 This frees resources for communication on the CPU This is for example a remedy for existing applications when communication already takes place cyclically in OB1 If necessary reduce the time taken for communication processing on the CPU by changing the parameters set for cyclic load due to communication in the properties dialog of the CPU S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 93 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections A 94 This chapter explains the following The general aspects of configuring communication connections How to configure ISO transport ISO on TCP UDP and TCP connections How to use the connection configuration functions to specify communica
167. egardless of the type of interface see above 4 Select the menu command PLC gt Download to Module STEP 7 then guides you through dialog boxes Note the additional information in the STEP 7 User Manual Chapter Configuring and Assigning Parameters to Modules 6 Deactivating the MAC Address in the Configuration If you deactivate the use of the MAC address when you are configuring the CP the CP can be reached via the preset MAC address however you cannot define any ISO transport connections or S7 connections over ISO connections in your configuration Non volatile storage of the project engineering data on CPs with data management You can download the configuration data step by step or all at once If you download step by step you will be prompted to start the download function separately for each module You must select this method if you want to save the configuration data in non volatile memory on the Ethernet CP In this case select the Copy to ROM button in the Download dialog for the CP Downloading the Configured Connections To download configured connections you use a corresponding download function in the connection configuration NetPro Notice If you have assigned a new address to the Ethernet CP or have configured connections you must always download the connection configuration again Remember that you also make suitable address adaptations for the other stations or substitut
168. em in the User Program The following steps are necessary to operate connections on the SIMATIC S7 PLC with the Ethernet CP Configuring iio see Section 5 3 1 Program the SEND RECEIVE interface in the user program Refer to Section 4 2 and the detailed FC description in Chapter 7 out a a ae ae a ee aaa q Configure connection properties see Sections 5 4 to 5 4 ela ae ON ae iad eee ae ear eae emer Naar ae ae ak ae Download connection configurations and user programs to the S7 station Legend _ necessary steps optional steps S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 95 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections 5 2 Possible Connection Configurations Communication connections are possible between the communication partners shown in the diagram below The communication partners can be in the same project or distributed in the subprojects of a multiproject Connections to communication partners outside a project are configured using the STEP 7 object Partner other project or using substitute objects such as Other stations or SIMATIC S5 S7 300 S7 ee 2 i AE tall Subnet 1 PG PC with Ethernet CP SIMATIC S5 Subnet 2 Other station with Ethernet attachment Figure 5 1 Possible Connections S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 96 Release 09 2007 C79000 G89
169. enevautiiwet ea teuwede deen Ged eevee Stee ws A 258 8 1 OVEIVICW o2 i 24 eels Be Leta REEE Reta E eeaeelabeesaen eis A 259 8 2 Functions of NCM S7 Diagnostics 0 cece eee eee A 260 8 2 1 Installing and Starting NCM S7 Diagnostics 05 A 261 8 2 2 General Menu Commands 00 ccc eee eee eens A 263 8 3 Starting Diagnostics 0 0 cc tenets A 265 8 3 1 Establishing a Connection to the Ethernet CP A 265 8 3 2 Starting Diagnostics from the CP Properties Dialog A 265 8 3 3 Starting Diagnostics from the Windows Start Menu A 266 8 3 4 Using a Gateway scr oc an cree eesaneN ate cece ees a oree cna e ates A 268 8 3 5 Using the PC Station Setting a Gateway with PC internal A 270 8 3 6 Other Ways of Starting Diagnostics 0 0 cee eee A 271 8 4 How to Use Diagnostics 0 ee eee A 272 8 5 Starting Diagnostic Functions Explicitly 0 0 0 0 eae A 273 8 6 Checklist for Typical Problems in a System 000 eae A 275 8 6 1 Checklist for General CP Functions 0 0000 cece eens A 276 8 6 2 Communication Connections Checklist 0 0000 e eae A 277 9 Firmware Loader 3a 2058 sayae out some etn det aee ee ect dire sews eseoae A 278 9 1 ADPIICANON orci are Gite a Gate eens on Pete toe ae oie cies tin eee Cae A 279 9 2 Loading RINNWANG sersa su 2 4 tine wee Oe pin RISE CERRAR
170. ent project Ege PROJECT ETHERNET ME SIMATIC 400 5 tation 2 H E SIMATIC 400 Station 3 Ea SIMATIC 5501 Unspecified l All broadcast stations Bais All multicast stations BB In unknown project Project PROJECT ETHERNET Station SIMATIC 400 5 tation 2 Module CPU 414 2 DP 1 Connection Type ISO transport connection IY Display properties before inserting Apply Cancel Help Figure 5 3 Layout of the New Connection Dialog Example of an ISO Transport Connection 3 Select the partner station to which you want to establish a connection if several CPUs exist please select the required CPU 4 Select the connection type you want to use for example ISO transport connection in the Type box When you confirm your input with Apply the new connection is created and the New Connection dialog box remains open This allows you to create further connections without needing to reopen the dialog box The connection table is updated at the same time When you click OK the connection is entered in the list the dialog is terminated and the display in the main dialog is updated If you click Cancel the dialog is terminated and the connection is not entered in the list S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 102 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections Handling Connections in a Multiproject CE Interprojec
171. er If you selected partner unspecified when you created the connection the option is deselected as default If you activate the option you must also specify the address of the partner in the Addresses tab Note Please note the effects on the mode If you want to use the FETCH or WRITE mode refer to the Options tab the mode must be set to Passive for the S7 station This value must be entered as a block call parameter ID for Display only calling the FC in the user program to identify the connection The ID changes if the local ID is changed This value must be entered as a block call parameter ID for Display only calling the FC in the user program to identify the connection Connection Name Reference Only in Multiproject Block Parameters If you create a connection to a partner in another project that has not yet been LE 9 merged with the current multiproject you must enter a connection name as 7 reference Interproject connections can then be joined up based on this reference As soon as the connections have been brought together the connection name reference can no longer be entered S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 121 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections 5 5 2 Specifying ISO on TCP Addresses Address Parameters A connection is specified by the local and remote connection endpoint e Local addresses Local IP
172. er ID is disabled The LOCKED output indicates whether or not the lock was successful If the lock was not successful the job must be triggered again in a later CPU cycle The STATUS output indicates the status of the CP for this connection Call Call interface in FBD representation AG LOCK LOCKED STATUS Example in STL representation STL Explanation call fc 7 Block call ID DB 100 DBW 2 Connection ID acc to configuration LADDR W 16 0100 LADDR 256 dec in hardware configuration LOCKED DB 100 DBX 0 6 Status code of access lock STATUS DB 100 DBW 4 Status code Explanation of the Formal Parameters The following table explains all the formal parameters for the AG_LOCK function S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 204 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC7 AG_LOCK continued Parameter Declara Possible Remarks tion Values ID INPUT INT 1 2 16 for The connection number of the connection is 7 300 specified in the parameter ID See 1 2 64 for Configuration Section 5 3 1 S7 400 LADDR INPUT WORD Module start address When you configure the CP with STEP 7 hardware configuration the module start address is displayed in the configuration table Specify this address here LOCKED OUTPUT BOOL 0 not yet Shows the status of the access lock requested locked on the specified FE
173. er for the connection Name Name entered for the connection endpoint CPU Applications If you display all the ISO transport connections being operated in this station in the multiprocessor mode with PC stations multiple applications the CPU application that is the endpoint of the particular connection is specified here R S or via CP With S7 CPs Rack slot of the local CP via which the connection is established With PC stations Display of the CP over which the connection is maintained Remote Specifies the remote MAC address of the connection on the Ethernet address subnet Local TSAP Transport Service Access Point for the local connection endpoint Partner TSAP Transport Service Access Point for the remote connection endpoint Mode Displays the mode configured in the Options tab Status Indicates the current configuration of the connection Connections without assignment are indicated by No local CP No remote CP in the status column and a character at the end of the Local ID for example 0002 A000 Connections you are currently editing are also indicated by the local ID at the end of You can set the column widths in the Overview tab individually Connection Overview with Multiple CPUs in an S7 Station If you operate more than one CPU in your S7 station you can click the button to extend the overview to the connections on all CPUs A 118 S7
174. erties dialog You can create an unspecified connection simply by selecting station unspecified for the connection partner when you create the connection The unspecified connection can be used in three ways explained below based on the example of an ISO on TCP connection ISO transport and TCP connections are analogous e Declare readiness for communication passive connection establishment The connection establishment is then set to passive see settings in the General tab The address setting for the ISO on TCP connection is then as follows The remote IP address and the remote TSAP are empty in other words they are not relevant for the CP When the connection is established any partner is accepted partner connection name that addresses the CP with the correct IP address and TSAP It is also possible to use a partial specification in other words communication is permitted with any partner that matches the specified TSAP e Connection to a specific station in any project The address setting for the ISO on TCP connection is then as follows You can specify the remote IP address and the port of any destination station The destination station can be in the current STEP 7 project or in another project Use this method if you have not created a substitute object for the partner station for example SIMATIC S5 in the current project e IP Address Assignment over DHCP If you select the option to obtain the IP addres
175. es of data is supported by newer version CPs Please note the information in the product information bulletin manual of the Ethernet CP f Remember that with this configuration on an S7 300 one connection resource free connection for S7 functions of the S7 300 CPU is used CPU connection resources are also used for example by S7 300 CPs in the FMS mode or by PGs and OPs For more detailed information about the maximum connection resources refer to 1 Please note the information in Section 7 1 on the newer CP types S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 A 65 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with Table 3 1 Settings in the Options Tab continued Option Replace module without PG Meaning Effect With this option you can have the configuration data of the CP stored on the CPU If you then replace CP the configuration data for the new CP are downloaded automatically from the CPU when the CP is started up If you select this option the configuration data are stored long term on the CPU instead of in the EPROM of the CP Remember however that long term storage on the CPU is only safe from power outages if the CPU is protected by battery backup or by using an S7 Memory Card Note If you store the configuration data on the CPU please read the note below The following functions do not modify the configuration data on the CPU
176. et CP aie Figure 1 3 Nodes Communicating on S7 Connections over Industrial Ethernet S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 27 C79000 G8976 C182 08 1 Communication via Ethernet CPs in S7 Stations e Client and server functionality at one end only S7 connections configured at one end In the following situations write and read functions can be implemented with PUT GET on one ended S7 connections S7 communication over router PG PC stations can access S7 stations if the PG PC stations are connected to a different subnet or subnet type PROFIBUS Ethernet via routers for example an IE PB Link in this case S7 stations are servers S7 communication is possible over a gateway PUT GET Ethernet lt __ se E Ss _ 7 PC PG Station Ethernet IE PB Link PUT GET Figure 1 4 PC PG station communicates over a gateway with S7 stations on an underlying PROFIBUS or Ethernet For more detailed information on the features supported by your Ethernet CP refer to the device specific part of this manual 2 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 28 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 1 Communication via Ethernet CPs in S7 Stations Configuring S7 Connections Create S7 connections to use S7 communication for data exchange between two SIMATIC S7 stations For more detailed information refer to the STEP 7 Descrip
177. et Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 61 C79000 G8976 C182 08 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with 3 3 3 Displaying the Network Attachments of a Station Procedure You can easily get an overview of the network attachment configurations of a SIMATIC station in one of the following ways e A graphic overview in NetPro e An overview in table form in the Properties dialog of the station Graphic Overview in NetPro The NetPro view provides you with a good overview of the networked stations Follow the steps below 1 Double click one of the network objects for example Ethernet in your project in the SIMATIC Manager ae NETPRO Configuring Networks Network To Project D siemensi5 TEP 402 Examples EXIE a Network Edit Insert PLC View Options Window Help e os BLA de Ethernet 1 Industrial Ethernet MPI Metz 1 3 MPI SIMATIC 400 Station 1 SIMATIC 400 Station 2 SIMATIC 400 Station 3 SIMATIC S561 Era CPU CP Era CPU CP Era CP JEE 4i4 443 4i4 443 443 E o m o m m 2 2 2 7 Figure 3 3 NetPro View of a Subnet of the Type Industrial Ethernet S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 62 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with Overview in Table Form The table view in the Properties dialog of the station provides a detailed overview of the components used for network attachment Follow the steps below 1 Using
178. eturns these projects to the multiproject and synchronizes the interproject data with system support and where necessary the executes the required interproject functions In this case agreement is necessary for example regarding the assignment of connection names because it will be far easier when synchronizing the projects to bring connections with identical connection names together S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 40 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 1 Communication via Ethernet CPs in S7 Stations e The topic of multiprojects is dealt with in detail in the STEP 7 basic help Here you will find information on the following topics HLP Requirements for interproject functions How to create multiprojects How to create a new project in a multiproject How to separate a project from a multiproject How to include projects in the multiproject How to synchronize projects in a multiproject Moving stations within a multiproject when a station is moved from one project of a multiproject to another project of the same multiproject for example using drag amp drop the interproject connections are retained Possible problems in distributed projects and tips on how to avoid them Possibilities for stations outside the current project The addition of the multiproject functionality means that the following situations can arise Connection to a partner in an unknown project The new multiproj
179. f the FB Data in the header of CONF_DB was possibly overwritten Further errors detected on the interface between the CPU and CP 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 8A01H 8A02H 8A03H 8A04H 8A05H B8A06H The status code in the data record is invalid value is gt 3 There is no job running on the CP the FB however expected an acknowledgment for a completed job There is no job running on the CP and the CP is not ready the FB triggered the first job to read a data record There is no job running on the CP and the CP is not ready the FB nevertheless expected an acknowledgment for a completed job There is a job running but there was no acknowledgment the FB nevertheless triggered the first job for a read data record job A job is complete but the FB nevertheless triggered the first job for a read data record job Errors detected when evaluating the FB on the CP 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 A 224 8BO01H 8BO02H 8B031 8B04nH 8B05n 8BO6nH 8BO07H 8B08H Communication error The DB could not be transferred Parameter error Double parameter field Parameter error The subfield in the parameter field is not permitted Parameter error The length specified in the FB does not match the length of the parameter fields subfields Parameter error The length of the parameter field is invalid Parameter error The length of the subfield is invalid Parameter error The ID
180. f you adhere to the installation and safety instructions contained in this manual and in the documentation 1 3 and 4 A Warning Personal injury and damage to property may occur By installing expansions that are not approved for SIMATIC S7 CPs or their target systems the requirements and regulations regarding safety and electromagnetic compatibility may be violated Only use expansions approved for the system Notice for Australia The SIMATIC NET S7 CPs listed above meet the requirements of the AS NZS 2064 standard Class A Notice for Canada This class A digital device meets the requirements of the Canadian ICES 003 standard S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 285 C79000 G8976 C182 08 B Standards and Approvals for SIMATIC NET S7 CPs AVIS CANADIEN Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada UL and CSA Approval Note You can recognize which of the following UL CSA or cULus approvals apply to your product by the markings on the type plate UL Approval UL Recognition Mark Underwriters Laboratories UL according to standard UL 508 e Report E 85972 E CSA Approval CSA Certification Mark Canadian Standard Association CSA according to SP standard C 22 2 No 142 e Certification Record 063533 C 000 cULus Approval Hazardous Location CULUS Listed 7RA9 IND CONT EQ FOR HAZ LOC C UL US Underwriters Lab
181. following You can use the complete range of functions of STEP 7 on Industrial Ethernet You can use programming diagnostic operating and monitoring functions on all modules in the SIMATIC S7 PLC via Industrial Ethernet e OP Operation PG OP communication on Industrial Ethernet allows the operation and monitoring of all modules in a SIMATIC S7 PLC using operator interface systems TD OP The Ethernet CP acts as a communications relay that relays the PG OP communication via Industrial Ethernet The following schematic illustrates how PG OP communication can be used locally or remotely e Local over Ethernet modules in the PG e Remote over Ethernet modules in the PG and over routers the option of a PG PLC remote link with TeleService over a TS adapter is also shown S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 23 C79000 G8976 C182 08 1 Communication via Ethernet CPs in S7 Stations S7 Ethernet attachment 400 I Ethernet CP Ind Ethernet over TCP IP Figure 1 2 A 24 Operator Interface function Ind Ethernet S7 300 Create configuration data for every CP and do
182. g Release 09 2007 A 173 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs The interface to several communication services is implemented by ready made program blocks FCs and FBs This chapter includes a detailed description of these blocks The description of each FC FB includes the following sections and these may be extended by further information specific to the FC FB e Meaning e Call Interface e How the Block Works e Explanation of the Formal Parameters e Condition Codes This chapter provides you with information over and above the general information available in the online help for the FCs when programming in STEP 7 Y You will find further information in the following sources e The communication FBs BSEND BRCV PUT GET USEND URCV C_CNTRL for programming S7 communication are described in the STEP 7 Documentation 8 Sample configurations and programs are available for the SEND RECEIVE interface described here e Inthe sample project PROJECT ETHERNET that you can start immediately after installing NCM S7 for a description refer to the Primer e On the Internet as downloadable sample projects refer to the information in Appendix C Support and Training mo 7 The Quick Start CD that can be ordered separately is a Wh VATI G Pe treasure trove of sample programs and configurations od alerako as x Pin a me epee fo be Foley ir Bald You can order this direc
183. g STEP 7 functions or dialogs CP properties dialog Windows Start menu Connections properties dialog NetPro Hardware configuration HW Config These possibilities are described below 8 3 2 Starting Diagnostics from the CP Properties Dialog If the project data are available on your PG PC follow the steps outlined below 1 2 3 4 Select the S7 station in the project and open the hardware configuration HW Config Select the CP and open the Properties dialog Select the Diagnostics dialog Select the Run button Result NCM S7 Diagnostics is opened The path is set automatically to match the current connection in STEP 7 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 265 C79000 G8976 C182 08 8 NCM S7 Diagnostics 8 3 3 Starting Diagnostics from the Windows Start Menu If there are no configuration data on your PG PC follow the steps outlined below to start diagnostics with a connected CP 1 Open the Windows Start menu and select the command SIMATIC gt STEP 7 gt Diagnostics NCM S7 Diagnostics is started with the message No online connection to the CP in the contents area 2 In the displayed dialog NCM S7 Diagnostics select the interface to match your hardware configuration Depending on the type of network attachment you have you will be prompted to specify an address Table 8 2 Possible Settings for the Online Paths without P
184. gh 64 e 7 300 1 2 through 16 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 164 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 6 Programmed Communication Connections 6 5 1 Parameter Field for TCP Connection Structure ID connection ID Freely assignable connection reference must be specified in AG_SEND AG_RECV No_of_ subfields n l Range of values for the connection ID Subfield 1 e S7 400 1 2 through 64 Subfield 2 e S7 300 1 2 through 16 Subfield n Type 1 Identifier for the connection type Usable Subfields Table 6 5 Subfield Parameter ID Type Special Features Notes Use Please refer also to the general mandatory description in Table 6 10 Page A 171 optional 1 SUB _IP_V4 IP address of the partner m 9 SUB_LOC_ PORT m 10 SUB REM PORT m 18 SUB CONNECT NAME O 19 SUB_LOC_ MODE O 21 SUB _KBUS ADR This value is always set to 2 for CPs for the m for S7 400 S7 300 and does not need to be specified 22 SUB CON ESTABL m The general properties of the subfield types are described below in Section 6 6 Option using passive connection Note Please read the description of the configurable connection properties for the TCP connection in Section 5 6 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 165 C79000 G8976 C182 08 6 Programmed Communication Connections 6 5 2 Structure Pa
185. gurations and programs are available for the SEND RECEIVE interface described here e Inthe sample project PROJECT ETHERNET that you can start immediately after installing NCM S7 for a description refer to the Primer e On the Internet as downloadable sample projects refer to the information in Appendix C Support and Training The Quick Start CD that can be ordered separately is a treasure trove of sample programs and configurations You can order this directly over the Internet at http www4 ad siemens de WW news en 21827955 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 85 C79000 G8976 C182 08 4 SEND RECEIVE Interface in the User Program 4 1 Functions FCs Figure 4 1 How the SEND RECEIVE Interface Works on the CPU The following functions FCs are available for handling communication on connections e AG _SEND AG_LSEND AG_ SSEND This block takes the user data from the specified user data area and transfers it to the Ethernet CP e AG _RECV AG_LRECV AG SRECV This block transfers received user data to the user data area specified in the call The diagram below illustrates the situation Using the FCs AG_SEND AG_LSEND AG_SSEND and AG_RECV AG_LRECV AG_SRECYV the user program instructs the Ethernet CP to send or receive data on the configured connection CPU Ethernet station SIMATIC S7 STEP 7 user program User data areag
186. h an online connection to the same CP this can for example be useful if you want to monitor the diagnostic buffer at the same time as running diagnostic functions on a connection Requirement You have an online connection available via the LAN ISO or TCP IP on the one hand and an online connection via the communication K bus on the other alternatively via the CPU or via PG channel routing via a further CP S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 271 C79000 G8976 C182 08 8 NCM S7 Diagnostics 8 4 How to Use Diagnostics Procedure To use diagnostics efficiently particularly when working with the diagnostic tool for the first time the following procedure can be recommended 1 Use the sequence shown below as a basis for using diagnostics Start NCM S7 Diagnostics Establish the connection to the CP Section 8 3 Set the options Section 8 2 2 Identify the Ethernet CP Query the current status of the CP Operating Mode diagnostic object If the CP is not If the CP is in the RUN mode in the RUN mode TCP connections ISO transport connections ISO on TCP connections UDP connections If anything unusual is displayed for connection status receive status send status View evaluate the diagnostic buffer to obtain an overview and detailed explanation of diagnostic events If necessary correct configuration or programming NE 2 Clarify your p
187. h newer CP types S7 300 only With the newer CP types optimized data transfer on the SEND RECEIVE interface is available In particular with longer data records this allows a much higher data throughput on the interface between the CPU and CP S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 195 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC6 AG_RECV FC60 AG_LRECV FC63 AG_SRECV continued e Case a Sequence with older CP types When the FC is called the user program prepares the buffer for the received data and instructs the CP to enter the received data there As soon as a data record has been entered fully and consistently in the receive buffer this is indicated by the parameter NDR 1 in one of the next FC calls The status code in the output parameters NDR ERROR and STATUS is updated in each block call and can be evaluated User program Ethernet CP Communications Partner CPU cycle Transfer of A active over AG H Ethernet No data available yet 1 a ed Job completed without error Accept evaluate Transfer of B active over Ethernet received data A D B No qata a allable yet 1 AG _RECV OD COMOICLCO without error Accept evaluate received data B Transfer AG RECV of C active over Ethernet Time Time Time Legend 1 Parameter transfer NDR ERROR
188. he STEP 7 release Note We recommend that you always use the latest block versions for all module types You will find information on the current block versions and the current blocks to download from the Internet in our customer support http support automation siemens com WW view en 8797900 With the older module types this recommendation assumes that you are using the latest firmware for the particular block type S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 FCs when 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs Notice In some sections this chapter contains information on various CP versions for S7 300 These sections are indicated by the following symbol vlys 4 S Newer CP types are CPs module types with the following versions or higher CP 343 1 Lean 6GK7 343 1CX10 OXE0 version 1 or higher firmware version V1 0 or higher CP 343 1 6GK7 343 1EX30 0XE0 version 1 as of firmware version V2 0 or higher CP 343 1 6GK7 343 1EX21 OXEO0 version 1 or higher firmware version V1 0 or higher CP 343 1 Advanced 6GK7 343 1GX21 OXE0 version 1 or higher firmware version V1 0 or higher CP 343 1 CP 343 1 EX20 6GK7 343 1EX11 OXEO0 version 1 or higher firmware version V2 0 or higher 6GK7 343 1EX20 0XE0 version 1 or higher firmware version V1 0 or higher CP 343 1 IT CP 343 1 IT GX20 6GK7 343 1GX11 OXE0 version 1 or higher fi
189. he block type 7 300 With older versions of FC AG_SEND up to V3 0 the data area is always restricted to a maximum of 240 bytes a7 The current versions allow up to 8192 VY bytes 2048 bytes for UDP 7 400 With FC AG_SEND the data area is restricted to a maximum of 240 bytes Note on the S7 400 Data transfer may be restricted to LEN lt 240 bytes with older versions of the CP firmware For further information see 2 Improved performance with shorter data records Transfer of data records up to 240 bytes results in better performance regardless of the block type used This parameter indicates whether or not the job was completed without errors As long as DONE 0 no further job can be triggered DONE is set to 0 by the CP when it accepts a new job For the meaning of this parameter in conjunction with the ERROR and STATUS parameters refer to the following table ERROR OUTPUT BOOL 0 1 error For the meaning of this parameter in conjunction with the DONE and STATUS parameters refer to the following table STATUS OUTPUT WORD see following table Status code The following table shows the condition codes formed by the DONE and ERROR parameters S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 A 191 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC5 AG SEND FC50 AG _LSEND
190. he complete data field is not sent on an ISO transport ISO on TCP UDP connection The buffer specified with the ANY pointer is too small What to do Correct the LEN parameter and the ANY pointer S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 A 277 9 Firmware Loader This chapter will familiarize you with the uses and handling of the Firmware Loader The Firmware Loader allows you to download more recent firmware versions to the SIMATIC NET modules For more detailed information on the various load options refer to the integrated help S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 278 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 9 Firmware Loader 9 1 Application Firmware Here firmware means the system programs in the SIMATIC NET modules Uses of the Firmware Loader The Firmware Loader allows you to download more recent firmware versions to the SIMATIC NET modules It is used on the following e PROFIBUS modules e Industrial Ethernet modules e Modules for Gateways for example IE PB Link Installation The firmware loader is available when you have installed NCM S7 on your PG PC Load Files The Firmware Loader supports the following file types e lt file gt FWL A file form that contains extra information that can be displayed in the dialogs of the firmware loader in addition to the information of the LAD file
191. he following table OUTPUT Error code For the meaning of this parameter in conjunction with the NDR and STATUS parameters refer to the following table STATUS OUTPUT see following table Status code For the meaning of this parameter in conjunction with the NDR and ERROR parameters refer to the following table EXT_ STATUS OUTPUT If an error occurs in the execution of a job the parameter indicates which parameter was detected as the cause of the error in the configuration DB High byte Index of the parameter field Low byte Index of the subfield within the parameter field S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 A 222 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FB55 IP_CONFIG continued Reserved Port Numbers The following local port numbers are reserved you should not use these for other purposes in the connection project engineering Table 7 8 Reserved Port Numbers Protocol Port number Service TCP 80 HTTP TCP RFC1006 TCP 135 RPC DCOM UDP SNMP_ REQUEST UDP 65532 NTP UDP 65534 NTP UDP 65535 NTP Condition Codes The following table shows the condition codes formed by the DONE ERROR and STATUS parameters that must be evaluated by the user program Table 7 9 Condition Codes for FB55 IP_CONFIG DONE ERROR STATUS Meaning General codes relating to job execution
192. he frames were intended for it To avoid these disadvantages S7 CPs handle broadcast as follows e Following reception the broadcast frames are filtered out with high priority by all Ethernet CPs This means that frames that cannot be interpreted are discarded immediately Only frames that can be interpreted for example an ARP request are passed on over the LAN controller and evaluated This prevents a negative influence on the other connections by broadcast frames e For the application this means that the S7 CP cannot receive broadcast frames intended for the transfer of user data It is however possible for the module to send broadcast frames within the network S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections Addresses Tab Connection to all Broadcast Nodes If you select all broadcast nodes as the connection partner you specify that UDP frames are sent to all obtainable broadcast nodes In the Addresses tab a valid broadcast address in the network is proposed for the partner under the IP address IP You must enter a PORT address suitable for all partners you want to reach under PORT Properties UDP connection General Addresses Ciptions Overview Status Information The ports are valid in the range from 1 to 65535 value higher than 1024 is recommended since the well known ports are located in the
193. he hardware configuration You receive the message CP has n connections the assignment will be lost in the connection table The connections remain without assignment to a CP in the connection table In the Overview tab of the Properties dialog the connections are identified with 7 Once you have placed a CP in the hardware configuration and networked it 1 Assign the CP in the connection properties dialog in the Addresses tab or Reassign the connection using the menu option Edit gt Connection Partner Check the module start address and if necessary adapt it in the user program Adapt the connection ID in the user program Download the connection configuration to the CP again S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 A 107 5 Configuring Communication Connections Table 5 3 Actions That Can Cause Changes to Configured Connections continued Action Deleting the SIMATIC S7 station Consequences for the Connections All the connections to this station are deleted within the project Note The does not apply to connections to a partner that uses a router How to Establish the Connection Again Reconfigure the station and connections Deleting a remote station The connections of the stations in the project to remote stations remain without assignment in the connection table I
194. hout assignment A 107 dynamic properties A 116 printing configured connections A 106 properties dialog A 110 addresses A 114 dynamics A 116 general A 111 overview A 118 save connection A 106 Unspecified connection A 115 ISO on TCP connection addresses A 122 checking A 125 parameter field for A 167 properties A 119 specifying the connection partner A 120 Job header on UDP connections A 184 MAC address A 83 Module replacement A 177 Multicast with UDP A 141 A 144 Multiproject A 35 A 40 configuring connections A 97 A 103 N NCM 7 general information A 54 installation A 54 NCM 7 Diagnostics A 68 NCM S7 diagnostics overview A 259 NCM S7 Diagnostics online path examples of an online path with gateway A 268 Examples of an online path without gateway A 267 NCM S7 diagnostics online path examples of an online path with PC internal A 270 NCM 7 Diagnose A 258 Network access A 16 New connection A 101 NTP mode A 68 O Operator interface devices A 26 A 27 Order numbers A 283 Other station A 35 A 103 configuring A 74 connecting a subnet A 75 P PC internal A 270 PG communication in configured mode A 25 in PG operation A 25 with STEP 7 on PROFIBUS A 25 PG operation with STEP 7 via Ethernet A 23 PG PC interface A 27 PN_ InOut FB88 block programming A 227 PN lO X FB90 block programming A 227 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commiss
195. ic or event driven processing we recommend the following procedure to call the FB88 FB90 blocks If you use a time driven call remember that the block must be called repeatedly after it has been started until the DONE flag is set To allow the CBA data to be copied between the CPU and CP without any longer interruptions the follow on calls should be as fast as possible and independent of the timing Note the following recommendations for programming e The timing is provided by a timer OB The timer OB should only cause the first call for the PROFINET CBA blocks FB88 or FB90 not by calling the block directly but for example by setting a start flag e The call of the PROFINET CBA blocks FB88 and FB90 should then always be made in OB1 OB1 starts the call as soon as the start flag is set by the timer OB e After the first block call this is repeated in OB1 until the DONE bit is set or until an error occurs the start flag must then be reset Result The CBA user data can be copied between the CPU and CP without any significant interruption thanks to separating the timer OB from the actual block calls in OB1 You can select the interval between the first calls depending on the requirements of your application S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 232 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 8 FCs and FBs for PROFINET IO Overview 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs The FCs
196. ication Services Setting Up Connections You must set up connections for the connection oriented services supported by the Industrial Ethernet CP see also the Table in Section 1 2 e S7 connections see the STEP 7 user manual 6 e ISO transport connections see Section 5 4 e ISO on TCP connections see Section 5 5 e TCP connections see Section 5 6 e Connections for UDP see Section 5 7 e E mail connections see manual for CPs with IT functionality 5 e Interconnections for PROFINET CBA communication see manual Component based Automation configuring plants with SIMATIC iMap 19 The information in the STEP 7 user manual 6 in the chapter Creating Communication Connections Between Two Programmable Modules also applies to the additional types of connection possible with the CPs You will find this information in the online help with integrated in STEP 7 by selecting Help gt Contents Select the topic Configuring Connections and Data Exchange S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 77 C79000 G8976 C182 08 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with 3 4 Assigning Addresses for the First Time Applies to Latest CPs Meaning of the Address Assignment MAC Address and IP Address The CP ships with a factory set MAC address Without further configuration the device can only be accessed over the Ethernet port using this MAC address In its original state you can already use
197. ice In a further step you will also need to assign the CP to the PROFINET IO system as a PROFINET IO device e Device Name Name of the device according to DNS conventions The device name must be unique on the Ethernet subnet If the CP is operating as PROFINET IO controller the device name is derived from the short identifier STEP 7 gives you the option of adding the name of the IO system as part of the device name automatically To use this feature select the option Use name in device controller in the properties of the PROFINET IO system e CBA communication To be able to use the S7 station with PROFINET CBA specify the CP to be used for the componentization for PROFINET CBA or SIMATIC iMap S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 A 73 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with 3 3 5 Overview Substitute Objects in the STEP 7 Project Communication connections can be configured fully when the communications partners are available in the current project For the stations on the Ethernet subnet whose configuration data were not created in STEP 7 or whose configuration data are not managed in the currently active project the following substitute objects can be created in the project e SIMATIC S5 stations e PG PC e Other stations for devices of other manufacturers for SIMATIC S7 stations in another project not necessar
198. iguring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 Ethernet CP Communications Partner Transfer of A e g 520 bytes active over Ethernet t error Transfer of B e g 240 bytes active over Ethernet ob completed withollit error Transfer of e a active over Ethernet Time Time A 197 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC6 AG_RECV FC60 AG_LRECV FC63 AG_SRECV continued Explanation of the Formal Parameters The following table explains all the formal parameters for the AG_RECV AG_LRECV AG_SRECV function Parameter Declara Possible Remarks tion Values The connection number of the ISO transport connection is specified in the ID parameter See Configuration Section 5 3 1 Module start address When you configure the CP with STEP 7 hardware configuration the module start address is displayed in the configuration table Specify this address here Specifies the address and length The address of the data area refers to one of the following Bit memory Data block area Note on length Performance is improved when transferring data records up to 212 bytes if you also restrict the length to 212 with the RECV parameter OUTPUT O This parameter indicates whether new data 1 new data were received For the meaning of this parameter in conjunction with the ERROR and STATUS parameters refer to the
199. ing A 186 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC5 AG SEND FC50 AG _LSEND FC53 AG_SSEND continued Notice Please note the following special feature on TCP connections With the older S7 CPs for S7 400 you must use FC AG_LSEND on TCP connections With the latest S7 CPs for S7 300 you must also use FC AG_SEND for TCP connections Note If you want to use FC53 AG_SSEND you will need to select the SPEED SEND RECV mode in the Options tab of the properties dialog for the configured connection in STEP 7 NetPro How the Block Works The following diagrams illustrate the normal sequence of data transmission triggered in the user program using AG_SEND The way in which the FC functions depends on the CP type you are using e Case a Sequence with older CP types With older CP types the transfer of the entire data area regardless of its length is started after the first block call by the CP f e Case b Sequence with newer CP types S7 300 only With the newer CP types data transfer has been optimized In particular with longer data records this allows a much higher data throughput on the interface between the CPU and CP S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 187 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC5 AG SEND FC50 AG _LSEND FC53 AG SSEND
200. ing Addresses for the First Time Applies to Latest CPs A 78 3 4 1 Addressing by Selecting the Target System in the SIMATIC Manager A 79 3 4 2 Addressing using the Properties Dialog in HW Config or NetPro A 81 3 5 Downloading the Configuration Data to the Target System A 82 4 SEND RECEIVE Interface in the User Program 000eeeeeeeeenes A 85 4 1 How the SEND RECEIVE Interface Works on the CPU A 86 4 2 Programming the SEND RECEIVE Interface 0 A 87 4 3 Data Exchange S7 CPU lt gt Ethernet CP 00 A 90 4 4 Additional Information 0 0 0 0 cee eens A 92 4 4 1 Programming Data Transfer on TCP Connections A 92 4 4 2 Recommendations for Use with a High Communications Load A 93 5 Configuring Communication Connections 0 cece eee eee A 94 5 1 Proceduro ss aiina Sa a eas Oe Ecosse hanes A 95 5 2 Possible Connection Configurations asrasa sanean A 96 5 3 COMME CHONG cade cenit cee a N Bioko ce we wee aus bee ae A 98 5 3 1 New Connection 0 eee eee n ees A 101 5 3 2 Connections to Partners in Other Projects 0000 eae A 103 5 3 3 Further Functions naaunaa annann a ad een eee SN et er deans A 106 5 3 4 Connections Without Assignment 00 ccc eee nee ees A 107 5 4 Configuring ISO Transport Connections eee eee A 110 5 4 1 Specifying the Local Connection Endpoin
201. interconnections are used with acyclic and cyclic transmission HTML process control With the CPs with IT functionality you use the supplied functions and HTML pages to query important system data using a Web browser refer to the IT CP manual for more information 5 File management and file access with FTP The CPs with IT functionality S7 400 S7 300 provide additional functions for FTP services You can use your S7 station both as an FIP client and as an FTP server refer to the manual of the IT CP 5 S7 Station as FTP Client You can transfer data blocks from or to a file server 7 Station as FTP Server Another station for example a PC transfers data blocks to or from the S7 station the file system on the CP with IT functionality S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 1 Communication via Ethernet CPs in S7 Stations 1 2 2 The communication Services of the Ethernet CPs Depending on the module type the S7 CPs support the following communications options Automation system Supported functions PG OP S7 S5 PROFINET IT Module compatible GBA IO S7 C7 300 CP 343 1 Lean 4 E 1 5 ER CP 343 1 gt Co CP 343 1 e 2 Advanced S7 400 CP 443 1 2 S7 400H CP 443 1 IT CP 443 1 2 Advanced 1 PROFINET IO device
202. ion about the status of your SIMATIC S7 components and functions and to sort out problems in a variety of different situations These options cover the following Hardware Diagnostics and Troubleshooting with STEP 7 Hardware diagnostics provides dynamic information on the operating mode of modules including CPs when the S7 station is online You can recognize the existence of diagnostic information for a module by the diagnostics icon in the project window of the SIMATIC Manager Diagnostic icons show the status of the corresponding module and also the operating mode of CPUs Detailed diagnostic information is displayed in the module information that you can open by double clicking a diagnostic icon in the quick view or the diagnostic view Communication Diagnostics with NCM S7 Diagnostics The NCM S7 Diagnostics described here provides dynamic information on the operating state of the communication functions of online CPs or modules HW Config Provides Static Information Static information means the configured communication properties of an online or offline CP and you can display this at any time using the hardware configuration shown by HW Config What You Should Already Know You should be familiar with the basic information in Chapter 2 on the significance of NCM 7 and working with it This means that you know how to connect the Ethernet CP to the PG and how to control the module using the PG Where to Find Further Inform
203. ioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 A 311 PROFIBUS A 16 SIMATIC mode A 68 PROFIBUS user interface to A 27 SIMATIC NET A 5 A 16 PROFINET communication A 17 A 18 Subfield types A 171 Programmed communication connections System data parameter field for A 162 A 22 System memory access using Project variant FETCH WRITE A 151 1 subnet 1 project A 37 1 subnet more than 1 project A 40 2 or more subnets 1 project A 39 T several subnets several projects A 43 several subnets several projects A 45 SIMATIC S5 and non SIMATIC devices A 38 TCP Connection checking properties A 133 TCP connection A 126 addresses A 129 parameter field for A 165 specifying the connection partner A 127 R Time of day synchronization A 65 A 68 Type of communication A 17 RJ 45 Jack for Twisted Pair Ethernet A 281 Routing A 153 U S UDP addresses A 137 S7 communication on Ethernet A 17 A 27 checking A 147 S7 communication relay A 17 A 27 configuring A 134 S7 functions A 17 UDP connection SEND RECEIVE interface A 17 parameter field for A 166 CPU cycle A 90 specifying the connection partner A 135 data exchange A 86 UL approval A 286 overview A 31 Unspecified connection A 104 user program A 87 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 312 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08
204. ions used in the sample DB follow Table 6 2 Type Definitions for the System Data Subfield STL Ex plana tion END_TYPE STRUCT id int len int r 3 BYTE r 2 BYTE r 1 BYTE r 0 BYTE END STRUCT END_ TYPE A 160 STRUCT id int len int b 3 BYTE b 2 BYTE b 1 BYTE b O BYTE END STRUCT STRUCT id int len int b 3 BYTE b 2 BYTE b 1 BYTE b 0 BYTE END STRUCT END_TYPE b 16 C8 b 16 0C b 16 01 b 16 90 TYPE SUB_NETMASK 16 FF 16 FF 16 FF 16 00 b b b b TYPE SUB_DEF ROUTER b 16 C8 b 16 0C b 16 01 b 16 50 Data structures IP Config TYPE SUB_IP V4 gt ID for IP V4 Addr Subfield length IP High 200 IP 12 IP 1 IP Low 144 ID for subnet mask Subfield length SNM_High SNM_ SNM_ SNM_Low ID_4 Router Subfield length R_ High R_ R_ R_Low S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 6 Programmed Communication Connections Table 6 3 Type Definitions for the Subfield TCP Connection STL Ex plana tion TYPE SUB_LOC_PORT STRUCT id int 9 ID_4 LOC_PORT len int 6 Subfield length port int 2001 Loc Port END_STRUCT END_TYPE TYPE SUB_REM_PORT STRUCT id int 10 ID_4_REM_PORT len int 6 Subfield length port
205. ious editors and distribute the stations to the projects according to their editors To allow this functions are available for branching and merging sub projects Interproject subnets and connections can be created Tools The SIMATIC Manager provides convenient tools for configuring and documenting networks also graphically with NetPro ie NETPRO Netz konfigurieren Netz zu Projekt PROJECT ETHERNET E Netz Bearbeiten Einf gen Zielsystem Ansicht Extras Fenster Hilfe aes 400 Station 1 cages 400 Station 2 aed 400 Station 3 imma S5 1 The chapter describing network configuration in 6 and the online help system also Ee contain information about configuring SIMATIC S7 networks HLP S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 35 C79000 G8976 C182 08 1 Communication via Ethernet CPs in S7 Stations Variants Before configuring networks with STEP 7 you should be aware of the various configurations possible in the STEP 7 project The following configurations are typical for stations networked with CPs Variant examples Characteristics Configuration 1 1 subnet 1 project Additional SIMATIC S5 stations and stations with equipment of other vendors 2 or more subnets 1 project 1 subnet more than one project More than one subnet more than one project oO oO BR W PY Internetwork connections TCP These variants will b
206. ize the data record O oO oa aoa aoa o aoa aoa aoa l roaoa la aoa yo o O O O OJ oOo OJ CO OJ O O e The specified data record length is wrong or e The CP changes to STOP 1 80B2y The logical address or the configured slot is not in use 80B4x PROFINET IO device or module signaling access to an illegal area 80B6x PROFINET IO device or module denies access 1 80B8x The module is signaling an illegal parameter olojo O S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 250 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs Table 7 13 PNIOQ RW_REC codes Meaning ERROR STATUS The data record cannot be read 80C1H The specified data record is currently being processed 80C2n There are too many jobs pending 1 80C3x Resources occupied memory 1 80CC44 Communication error occurs temporarily and a repetition in the user oO OO CO o 0 program will often remedy the problem S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 251 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs 7 8 7 FB 54 PNIO_ALARM FB54 is used for alarm evaluation by a CP 343 1 operating as PROFINET IO controller and should be called in its user program when the ADD_INFO parameter in FC12 is not equal to 0 After complete and error free transfer of all OUTPUT parameters of FB54
207. l Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 119 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections 5 5 1 Specifying the Local Connection Endpoint General Tab This tab of the Properties dialog displays general connection parameters that identify the local connection endpoint Properties 150 on TCP Connection Figure 5 10 Layout of the General Tab in the Properties Dialog for ISO on TCP Connections S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 120 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections Local Endpoint The entry is identical to the Local ID parameter in the Selectable connection table When you create the connection a name is proposed here Modifiable along with a connection number as suffix With unspecified connections use this box to identify the partner If the station contains more than one CP of the same type Display only connected to the same subnet you can select the connection route gt Route button see Section 5 9 If no CP is assigned for example because the CP has been deleted none is displayed here Active Connection With this option you specify whether the connection is Modifiable Establishment established by this S7 station This is the default setting when the address of the partner is specified ON the connection is established actively OFF the connection is established by the partn
208. l Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 228 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FB88 PN_InOut FB90 PN_InOut_Fast continued Parameter Declaration Remarks LADDR INPUT WORD Module start address When you configure the CP with STEP 7 HW Config the module start address is displayed in the configuration table Specify this address here Do not modify the parameter until the job is completed DONE 1 or ERROR 1 DONE OUTPUT BOOL Reports the positive completion of a job ERROR OUTPUT BOOL This indicates that the job could not be executed error free STATUS OUTPUT WORD This parameter supplies detailed information about the execution of the job Status codes can be returned during execution of the job DONE 0 and ERROR 0 Evaluating Status Codes Remember that the status codes DONE ERROR STATUS are updated at each block call The following table shows the condition codes formed by the DONE ERROR and STATUS parameters that must be evaluated by the user program Table 7 10 Codes for PN InOut FB88 and PN_InOut_Fast FB90 DONE ERROR STATUS Meaning 1 0 0000n Job completed without error No job being processed the block can be called 0 0 81814 e Job active or e only with FB90 Connection establishment to addressed module active see also information under 8090 0 1 81834 S7 300 only The service has
209. l Gateways If the CP requiring diagnostics can only be reached over several gateways you only specify the first gateway Routing over the other gateways is done automatically Node address gateway MAC 08 00 06 01 02 03 Rack slot 0 5 Attachment of gateway Industrial Ethernet Routing over other gateways is done automatically Node address PROFIBUS address 9 ee of target station MPI PROFIBUS AUTO S7 subnet ID of target network 0001 0001 Figure 8 4 Example of the Parameter Settings for the Online Path with Several Gateways S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 269 C79000 G8976 C182 08 8 NCM S7 Diagnostics 8 3 5 Using the PC Station Setting a Gateway with PC internal There is a special situation when you use your PC PG as a PC station and have therefore set the interface to PC internal local in Setting the PG PC Interface You must them set parameter values for the gateway even when you do not need to go through any other gateway to reach the target station Select the following settings e Gateway attachment MPI PROFIBUS AUTO e Node address gateway Enter the index of the module here The index is the virtual slot address of the component can be displayed using the Station Configuration Editor The index is identical to the slot number selected during configuration of the PC station in STEP 7 HW Config e S7 subnet ID
210. le connection reference must be specified in AG_SEND Range of values for the connection ID Subfield 2 e 7 400 1 2 through 64 e 7 300 1 2 through 16 Subfield n Usable Subfields Table 6 8 Subfield Parameter ID Type Special Features Notes Use Please refer also to the general mandatory description in Table 6 10 Page A 171 optional 1 SUB_IP_V4 IP address of the mail server over which m o the E mails are sent The IP address can be specified in absolute or symbolic form The symbolic form assumes that the IT CP knows the address of the domain name server DNS This must be entered during configuration of the IT CP in HW Config for more detailed information refer to the online help of HW Config 3 SUB DNS NAME DNS name of the E mail server m o 13 SUB EMAIL SENDER E mail address of the sender m 18 SUB CONNECT NAME O S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 168 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 Table 6 8 continued 6 Programmed Communication Connections Subfield Parameter ID Type Special Features Notes Use Please refer also to the general mandatory description in Table 6 10 Page A 171 optional 21 SUB _KBUS ADR This value is always set to O for CPs for the m for S7 300 and does not need to be specified S7 400 22 SUB CON ESTABL m The general properties of the subfield types are described
211. least 100 ms 0 83114 The destination station cannot be obtained under the specified Ethernet address 0 i 8312 Ethernet error on the CP O 8F224 Source area invalid for example Area does not exist in the DB LEN parameter lt 0 0 Eo 8F244 Area error reading a parameter 0 a 8F28H Alignment error reading a parameter 0 ie 8F32H Parameter contains a DB number that is too high S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 192 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC5 AG SEND FC50 AG _LSEND FC53 AG_SSEND continued Table 7 2 Condition Codes for AG_SEND AG LSEND AG_SSEND DONE O oO CO CO CO O O oO CO OO OJO O ERROR STATUS Meaning 8F33H DB number error 8F3An Area not loaded DB 8F 42h Timeout reading a parameter from the I O area 1 8F44H Address of the parameter to be read is disabled in the accessed rack 1 8F7Fu Internal error e g illegal ANY reference e g parameter LEN 0 8090H Module with this module start address does not exist The FC used does not match the system family being used different FCs must be used for S7 300 and S7 400 E 80914 Module start address not at a double word boundary 80924 In the ANY reference a type other than BYTE is specified S7 400 only The communication bus connection between the CPU and CP is not established Only with newer CPU versions
212. lishment were triggered 0000 00021 The reset job could not be transferred to the CP because the service has not started on the CP for example CP in Stop RESULT2 0000 0000 Default CMD Meaning 3 CN_STATUS_ALL all connections status This command returns the connection status of all connections established terminated in the RESULT 1 2 parameters at total of 8 bytes of group information The ID parameter must be set to 0 checked for 0 The CP is selected in the LADDR parameter When necessary you can obtain detailed information about a terminated or unconfigured connection using a further connection status call with CMD 1 RESULT for CMD 3 Meaning Parameter Hex value range RESULT1 FERRARE ij 32 bits Connection 1 32 e 0 connection terminated not configured e 1 connection established RESULT2 iiaiai E 32 bits Connection 33 64 e 0 connection terminated not configured e 1 connection established S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 217 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC10 AG_CNTRL Continued CMD Meaning 4 CN_RESET ALL all connections reset This command resets all connections The ID parameter must be set to 0 checked for 0 The CP is selected in the LADDR parameter Resetting the connections means that connections are aborted and est
213. listed below are available for transferring data cyclically on the PROFINET IO interface The significance of the FCs differs depending on how you use the CP as a PROFINET IO controller or PROFINET IO device in an S7 station FC can be used with Meaning 7 300 S7 400 PNIO_SEND FC11 xX On the PROFINET IO controller Sending process output data to the PROFINET IO devices On the PROFINET IO device Forwarding process input data to the PROFINET IO controller PNIO_RECV FC12 X On the PROFINET IO controller Receiving input data from the PROFINET IO devices On the PROFINET IO device Receiving process output data from the PROFINET IO controller The FBs listed below are available for transferring data data records alarm information acyclically on the PROFINET IO interface The two blocks can only be used in PROFINET IO controller mode FB can be used with Meaning S7 300 S7 400 PNIO_RW_REC FB52 X Read data record from a PROFINET IO device Write data record to a PROFINET IO device PNIO_ALARM FB54 xX Receive alarm information from the PROFINET IO devices S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 A 233 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs 7 8 1 FC11 PNIO_SEND The PNIO_SEND FC is used to transfer data in the PROFINET IO controller or PROFINET IO device modes of the CP
214. ll often remedy the problem 0 80D2nH Module start address incorrect S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 201 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs 7 4 FCs for Access Coordination with FETCH WRITE Overview The following FCs are available for FETCH WRITE function to coordinate access FC can be used with Meaning S7 300 S7 400 AG_LOCK FC7 X xX Locks external data access with FETCH WRITE AG_UNLOCK FC8 X X Releases external data access with FETCH WRITE Caution when Configuring If you use FCs AG_LOCK and AG_UNLOCK you must specify the following information for S7 400 stations in the configuration e in HW Config In the Addresses tab select the Address setting for LOCK UNLOCK option if this option is available How the Block Works With these FCs you can coordinate access to system memory areas so that no inconsistent data are created and transferred The control is from the user program in the S7 CPU that can if necessary disable an external FETCH WRITE access using an AG_LOCK call After a certain time or after the local write read access is completed an AG_UNLOCK job can be used to enable external access again Another advantage is that this access lock only applies to the FETCH WRITE connection specified in the call If more than one FETCH WRITE connection is configured these ca
215. llowing dialog S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 59 C79000 G8976 C182 08 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with Properties CP 443 1 AO S 7 Ea General El Options Diagnostics l Properties Ethernet interface CP 443 1 AO S General Parameters MAC Address of IF Protocol is being used Router l IP Address 140 80 0 3 Do not use router Subnet Screen Form 255 255 0 0 Use router Address f 40 60 0 3 Subnet not networked New Properties h Delete Abbrechen Hite Help Note You can open the dialog for setting the interface at any time from the Properties dialog of the CP in the General tab 1 If you have not yet created a subnet in the project or have not yet created the selected subnet you can now create a subnet To do this select the New button Result An object of the type network is created in the project 2 Check the addresses and if necessary change them The system enters the next free address automatically You will find detailed information on the address ranges in the online help Please note the following additional information MAC address The latest Ethernet CPs are supplied with a default MAC address address printed on the module To be sure that you have a unique address assignment do not enter a MAC address in the configuration the option is deactivated This means th
216. manual Multicomputing This functionality is not supported by the SIMATIC S7 300 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 2 3 4 2 3 5 2 Characteristics of the Ethernet CPs Removing Inserting Replacing Modules Note Removing and inserting the SIMATIC NET CPs for the SIMATIC S7 300 while the power is on is not permitted You should also remember that by removing a module from the rack all modules on the other side of it will be disconnected from the CPU A PG is required to download the configuration after replacing a module If the CP supports the option of saving the configuration data on the CPU it is also possible to replace a module without a PG see CP specific description Note on the S7 300 CPU Connection Resources Note that when using older S7 300 CPUs lt CPU 316 a maximum of four S7 type connections for CP communication are supported Of these four connections one is reserved for a PG and another for an OP HMI Human Machine Interface The newer CPUs from 10 99 onwards support twelve and the CPU 318 2DP supports sixteen S7 connections As a result the older S7 300 CPUs have only two free S7 connections available These two connections can be used for S7 communication for PROFIBUS FMS for longer data or FETCH WRITE and TCP connections with Industrial Ethernet Notice Removing and inserting the SIMATIC NET CPs for the SIMAT
217. mmissioning A 260 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 8 NCM S7 Diagnostics 8 2 1 Installing and Starting NCM S7 Diagnostics Installation NCM S7 Diagnostics is an integrated component of the NCM S7 for Industrial Ethernet optional package NCM S7 Ethernet Diagnostics is installed along with NCM S7 for Ethernet on your PG There are several ways in which you can start the diagnostic tool e Aus dem Standard Startmenu von Windows 95 NT uber die Programmgruppe SIMATIC Wahlen Sie diese Moglichkeit wenn Sie das STEP 7 Projekt in dem der CP konfiguriert wurde auf Ihrem PG nicht verf gbar ist Servicezwecke e Aus dem Eigenschaftendialog des jeweiligen CP von Ihrem STEP 7 Projekt aus Alternative 1 Alternative 2 e From the standard Start menu of e From the Properties dialog of the CP within Windows program group your STEP 7 project SIMATIC gt gt NCM Use this method if the STEP 7 project Te ee in which the CP was configured is not iz NetPro PROJECT ETHERNET Network C SIEMENS STEP Example available on your PG for service Hi Hw Config SIMATIC 400 1 Configuration COLOR_414 purposes Properties cP sasn iso rosa OOOO ae General Addresses Options Diagnostics i Module Diagnostics Start special diagnostics TB Documentation Information j TA License Management SIMATIC NET amp SIMATIC Manager JE Configure SIMATIC Workspace S S fe Se F F
218. mmissioning Release 09 2007 A 135 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections mes Besson dR Local Endpoint The entry is identical to the Local ID parameter in the Selectable connection table When you create the connection a name is proposed here Modifiable along with a connection number as suffix With unspecified connections use this box to identify the partner If the station contains more than one CP of the same type Display only connected to the same subnet you can select the connection route gt Route see Section 5 9 If no CP is assigned for example because the CP has been deleted none is displayed here Block Parameters ID This value must be entered as a block call parameter ID for Display only calling the FC in the user program to identify the connection The ID changes if the local ID is changed LADDR This value must be entered as a block call parameter ID for Display only calling the FC in the user program to identify the connection Connection Name Reference Only in Multiproject If you create a connection to a partner in another project that has not yet been 9 merged with the current multiproject you must enter a connection name as reference Interproject connections can then be joined up based on this reference As soon as the connections have been brought together the connection name reference can no longer be entered S7 CPs for Indus
219. munication Connections 5 7 4 Checking the Properties of a UDP Connection Overview Tab At the overview level all the configured UDP connections and their parameters in this station are displayed cannot be modified You can adjust the width of the columns in the table For an example of this display refer to Section 5 3 4 the ISO transport connection Parameter Description Local ID This is the connection ID of the UDP connection STEP 7 connection configuration DWORD Name loc endpoint Entered connection name This identifies the UDP connection 8 characters default length CPU Applications If you display all the ISO transport connections being operated in this station in the multiprocessor mode with PC stations multiple applications the CPU application that is the endpoint of the particular connection is specified here R S Rack slot of the local CP via which the connection is established Partner address Specifies the remote IP address of the connection Local port Local port 8 characters default length Remote port Remote port 8 characters default width Status Indicates the current configuration of the connection Connections without assignment are indicated by No local CP No remote CP in the status column and a P character at the end of the Local ID for example 0002 A000 Connections you are currently editing are also indicated by at the end of the local ID
220. n for example be used for certain specific system areas and a selective access coordination can be implemented The following diagram illustrates the usual chronological sequence of memory access coordination controlled in the user program with AG_LOCK and AG_UNLOCK S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 202 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs User program Ethernet CP Communications Partner CPU cycle Cycle n as FETCH WRITE LOCKED 0 access to DB x active AG_LOCK Cycle n 1 LOCKED 0 AG_LOCK LOCKED 1 FETCH WRITE Cycle n 2 FETCH WRITE rejected Data i processing in DB x AG_ UNLOCK Cycle n m STATUS 700x FETCH WRITE access to DB x active Time Time Time The lock job must first be monitored in the user program using the code in the return parameter LOCKED As long as LOCKED 0 is indicated it must be assumed that there is still a FETCH WRITE access active If LOCKED 1 is indicated this shows that the lock is active data can now be modified by the user program The status code is updated at each block call S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 203 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs 7 4 1 FC7 AG_LOCK Meaning of the Block Using the AG_LOCK block the data exchange using FETCH or WRITE on the connection selected with the paramet
221. n about the status of a communication connection A 274 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 8 NCM S7 Diagnostics 8 6 Checklist for Typical Problems in a System Meaning The following lists contain several typical problems and their possible causes and how you can use the NCM S7 Ethernet Diagnostics tool to remedy the situation The checklists deal with the following topics 1 Checklist for General CP Functions 2 Communication Connections Checklist Note In the column Identifying the Cause and Remedy you will see the diagnostic function recommended for dealing with the problem shown in bold face S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 275 C79000 G8976 C182 08 8 NCM S7 Diagnostics 8 6 1 Checklist for General CP Functions Table 8 5 Checklist for Typical Problems When Operating a CP in a System Problem The Ethernet CP will not change to the RUN mode Possible Cause Identifying the Cause and Remedy Invalid configuration Yellow STOP LED and red SF LED lit loaded on the Ethernet continuously Call up the diagnostic buffer in NCM S7 Ethernet Diagnostics Example of an entry CP STOP due to invalid CP parameter assignment What to do Correct the configuration of the Ethernet CP Switch set to STOP on the Query the operating mode in NCM S7 Ethernet CP Diagnostics Operating
222. n on connection status 13 only available for SEND RECV connections based on the ISO RFC TCP protocols with UDP the corresponding internal information is output 00 e Connection is terminated 01 e Connection establishment active 10 e Connection termination active 11 e Connection is established Bit 14 CP information 0 e CP in STOP 1 e CP in Run Bit 15 Reset ID 0 e FC10 has not yet reset a connection or the reset ID was cleared e The control block has executed a connection reset RESULT1 0000 Bits 16 31 Reserved O reserved for later expansions RESULT2 0000 0000 reserved for later expansions A 216 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC10 AG_CNTRL Continued CMD Meaning 2 CN_RESET connection reset This command resets the connection selected with ID The CP is selected in the LADDR parameter Resetting the connection means that a connection is aborted and established again active or passive depending on the configuration An entry is also generated in the diagnostic buffer in which the job result can be found RESULT for CMD 2 Meaning Parameter Hex value range RESULT1 0000 0001 The reset job was transferred to the CP successfully The connection abort and subsequent connection estab
223. n services support multicomputing e ISO transport connections e 1SO on TCP connections e 7 functions e TCP connections e UDP connections e E mail connections S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 50 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 2 Characteristics of the Ethernet CPs 2 4 4 Removing Inserting Replacing Modules Removing and inserting the SIMATIC NET CPs for the S7 400 while the power is on is possible without damaging the modules If a CP is replaced with a new CP with the same order number the configuration data simply needs to be downloaded again if it is not stored on the CPU see also CP specific sections of this manual 2 4 5 Note on the S7 400 CPU Connection Resources Note that in the S7 400 CPU one S7 connection is reserved for a PG and a further one for an OP HMI Human Machine Interface e Attaching the PG over MPI To execute ONLINE functions for example module diagnostics from a PG on an S7 400 CP via the MPI interface two connection resources addressing of the interface and the K bus are necessary on the S7 400 CPU These two connection resources should be taken into account in the number of S7 connections Example The CPU 412 1 has sixteen free resources for S7 functions available If a PG is to be used for diagnostics on the S7 400 CP and is connected to the MPI interface two connection resources are required on the S7 400 CPU so that 14 connection resource
224. n the Overview tab of the Properties dialog the connections are identified with P Reassign a remote station or evena local station using the menu option Edit gt Connection Partner Changing the subnet assignment of the CP The connections that were assigned via the CP remain without an assignment in the connection table In the Overview tab of the Properties dialog the connections are identified with 1 Note The does not apply to connections if a router is used Reassign the connections using the menu option Edit gt Connection Partner or in the Addresses tab of the properties dialog for the connection A 108 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections Display Example The status of connections is displayed in the Properties ISO Transport Connection dialog in the Overview tab Properties 150 Transport Connection General Addresses Dynamics Options Overview Status Information Connections Local ID Local TSAP 0001 A020 50 Merbi O74 08 00 06 01 00 01 150 1 Remot OO02 A020 I50 Merbi 074 08 00 06 01 00 01 50 2 0002 4021 IS0 Verbi Of 50 2 000a 4020 50 verbi 074 08 00 06 01 00 02 50 1 OO04 4020 50 Verb O74 08 00 06 01 00 03 150 1 0005 A020 I50 Merbi 08 00 06 01 00 03 50 2 gt Print Co
225. nd if necessary start error handling Note The user program cycle and the cycle of the IO data exchange between the PNIO controller and PNIO devices are independent of each other 7 8 5 Substitute Values The setting of substitute values is supported for the two following operational situations e Substitute values during startup operating mode change on the CPU from STOP to RUN e Substitute values if problems are detected remove insert or station failure return Substitute Values during Startup You can initialize the outputs with substitute values by setting a memory bit start up memory bit in the start up OB In cyclic mode OB1 evaluate this start up memory bit to call the PNIO SEND block with the initialization values when appropriate S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 246 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs Substitute values if a problem occurs only when operating as PROFINET IO controller lf there is a fault device submodule failed you can find out which submodules have failed by querying the status information IOCS IOPS status You then have the option of setting substitute values 7 8 6 FB52PNIO RW_REC FB52 is used both for the read data record and the write data record function in PROFINET IO controller mode FB52 can only execute one of the functions at any one time The read data
226. net Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 155 C79000 G8976 C182 08 6 Programmed Communication Connections Note Read the description of FB55 IP_CONFIG in Section 7 6 Configuration Limits A maximum of 64 connections can be specified in FB55 CP_CONFIG The most important factor however is the maximum number of connections supported by the CP type you are using see 2 Special Features Restrictions e Consistency check only with STEP 7 The connection configuration in STEP 7 involves consistency checks that are not possible or only possible with restrictions when using the programmed configuration e Connection configuration required on the partner When configuring specified connections in STEP 7 you implicitly create the connection for the partner with a programmed configuration this is not possible In this case you must configure suitable connections for the partner e DHCP DNS is supported IP address assignment is also possible using DHCP DNS even if you choose programmed configuration e No connection information when uploading When you upload the S7 station data in STEP 7 this does not contain the data of the programmed configuration S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 156 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 6 Programmed Communication Connections 6 2 Procedure Initial Situation The steps described here assume the following 1 You have created the local
227. nfiguration Print M Display connections of all CPUs Cancel Help Figure 5 4 Status of the Connections in the Overview Tab Example of ISO Transport Connections S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 109 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections 5 4 Configuring ISO Transport Connections Introduction When you create a connection in the New dialog you specify the connection type and as far as possible the connection partner When necessary you can adapt other connection partners that are set as default when you create a new connection as described below Opening the Dialog To call the dialog for special connection properties follow the steps outlined below 1 Select the required connection in the connection table 2 Select the menu option Edit gt Object Properties Result The Properties ISO Transport Connection dialog appears Tabs The following tabs are available for ISO transport connections A 110 General Displays parameters that identify the connection Addresses Displays the local and remote address information Dynamics Displays the relevant timers and counters Options Here you can decide whether or not you want to use the connection for one of the access types FETCH or WRITE Overview This is an overview of all the configured ISO transport connections of the selected station with their parameters and
228. nfiguring and Commissioning A 234 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC11 PNIO_ SEND continued Declara Possible tion Values Remarks CPLADDR_ INPUT WORD Module start address SEND IN OUT ANY as The address of Specifies the address and length VARTYP_ the data area Controller mode E only points to one of BYTE is the alternatives permitted e Memory bit area e Data block area The length should match the total length of the distributed IO configured in HW Config whereby address gaps are also transmitted Device mode The data structure results from the order of the slots of the input modules configured for this PROFINET IO device on the PROFINET IO controller line and their length without address gaps Please note the more extensive explanations or examples for your CP in the device specific Part B of this manual Notes e The block begins to transfer the data at address 0 regardless of how you configured the addresses regardless of the lowest configured address e Specifying an I O area is not permitted since you must first change the IOCS for GOOD before data can be accepted in the I O LEN INPUT INT Value gt 0 The maximum total length of the data areas to be transferred can be found in the device specific Part B of this manual in the Performance Data chapter They may differ for controller
229. ng the local and remote TSAPs there is a default value ISO 1 for the first connection between the two partners can be changed For a new connection between the two partners the default value ISO 2 is proposed With a new connection to a new partner the value ISO 1 is used again Addresses Tab Unspecified ISO transport connection If you select the partner type as unspecified depending on your task you can enter address information about the communication partner here The options available to you are explained in detail in Section 5 3 1 The Addresses tab shown here illustrates the situation in which the MAC address and the remote TSAP were not specified If you do not make any further settings this means that you are willing to accept a connection establishment request from any communication partner Properties 150 Transport Connection x Options Overview Status Information General Addresses Dynamics Local Remote MAC HEX 08 00 06 01 00 00 Po tsaP scWe fso 2 fF TSAP HEX 49 53 4F 20 323 O l poo 0 TS 4P length z Cancel Help Figure 5 8 Layout of the Addresses Tab of the Properties Dialog for an Unspecified Connection S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 115 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections 5 4 3 Specifying ISO Transport Dynamic Properties Dynamics Tab The Dynamics tab displays the relevan
230. nization e V defines a heterogeneous communication automation and engineering model PROFINET device With PROFINET CBA A device on Ethernet is a PROFINET device A PROFINET device can also have a PROFIBUS attachment as master and proxy PROFINET device for PROFIBUS devices PROFINET device proxy A PROFINET device that has the role of the master for PROFIBUS devices This allows PROFIBUS slaves to be included in PROFINET communication PROFINET IO Heterogeneous communication and engineering model for real time communication between PROFINET components PROFINET IO for example provides protocol elements for cyclic transfer of productive data PROFINET component With PROFINET CBA Software representation of a technological module with defined functionality An automation system is made up of several PROFINET components A PROFINET component always includes a technological function and the corresponding device SIMATIC IMap Engineering tool from Siemens for PROFINET CBA Allows the configuration commissioning and monitoring of modular distributed automation systems based on the PROFINET standard SIMATIC iMap STEP 7 AddOn Software for the SIMATIC iMap interface to STEP 7 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 301 C79000 G8976 C182 08 E Linking to Other Systems with FETCH WRITE The FETCH and WRITE modes supported on ISO transport connections TCP and ISO on TCP connections can be
231. nk Addison Wesley ISBN 3 89319 567 X TCP IP Internet Protokolle im professionellen Einsatz Mathias Hein International Thomson Publishing ISBN 3 8266 400 4 ITP Online Center http www ora de S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 C References and Literature RFC1006 Request For Comment RFC793 TCP RFC791 IP On the topic of programming Automation with STEP 7 in STL and SCL User Manual Programming Manual Berger H Publicis MCD Verlag 2001 On project engineering of PROFINET components and systems Basic help in the SIMATIC iMap engineering tool Siemens AG On project engineering of PROFINET CBA components and systems Component based Automation Configuring Plants with SIMATIC iMap Manual Siemens AG On the use and project engineering of PROFINET IO From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO Manual Siemens AG On the use and project engineering of PROFINET IO PROFINET IO System Description Manual Siemens AG Communication with SIMATIC System Manual Siemens AG S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 291 C79000 G8976 C182 08 C References and Literature Order Numbers an A 292 The order numbers for the SIEMENS documentation listed above can be found in the catalogs SIMATIC NET Industrial Communication Catalog IK PI
232. nly for S7 400 22 SUB_CON_ESTABL 1 4 Type of connection establishment With this option you specify whether the connection is established by this S7 station e Possible values 0 passive 1 active Refer also to Chapter 5 under Specifying the local connection endpoint for the individual connection types A 172 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 6 Programmed Communication Connections Table 6 10 continued Subfield Subfield type Subfield length Meaning of the Parameter ID 1 in bytes 23 SUB ADDR_IN_DATABLOCK 1 4 Select free UDP connection The remote node is entered in the job header of the job buffer by the user program when it calls AG_SEND This allows any node on Ethernet LAN WAN to be reached e Possible values 1 free UDP connection O otherwise The parameter is practical only fora UDP connection See also Section 5 7 5 24 SUB _NTP_SERVER 4 4 The sub block defines an NTP server from which the CP can obtain its time via the NTP protocol For the situation when one or more NTP servers are not obtainable up to 4 sub blocks of ID 24 can be defined The sub blocks of ID 24 may only be installed in the system parameter block type 0 ID O see Section 6 4 1 Note ID numbers not listed are not currently used S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissionin
233. no Order no Order no Order no Order no Order no Order no Order no Order no Order no Order no Order no Order no Order no 6GK7 343 1CX00 0XE0 6GK7 343 1CX10 OXE0 6GK7 343 1EX11 OXE0 6GK7 343 1EX20 0XE0 6GK7 343 1EX21 OXE0 6GK7 343 1EX30 0XE0 6GK7 343 1GX21 OXE0 6GK7 343 1GX20 0XE0 6GK7 343 1HX00 O0XE0 6GK7 443 1EX11 OXE0 6GK7 443 1EX20 0XE0 6GK7 443 1GX11 OXE0 6GK7 443 1EX40 0XE0 6GK7 443 1EX41 OXE0 6GK1411 5AA00 6GK1411 5AB00 6GK1417 5AB00 The SIMATIC NET S7 CPs listed above meet the requirements and criteria of the standard IEC 61131 2 Programmable Logic Controllers Part 2 Equipment Requirements and Tests S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 A 283 B Standards and Approvals for SIMATIC NET S7 CPs CE mark CE The SIMATIC NET S7 CPs listed above meet the requirements and aims of the following EU directives and comply with the harmonized European standards EN for programmable logic controllers published in the Official Journal of the European Communities e 89 336 EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive e 94 9 EEC Equipment and Protective Systems for Use in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Explosion Protection Directive The EU conformity certificates are available for the responsible authorities according to the above mentioned EU directive at the following address e Sieme
234. not yet started data acceptance is not yet possible 0 1 81844 e Bad instance DB generally triggered by illegal writing of the instance DB by the user program or e only with FB90 Bad send or receive job 0 1 80854 only with FB90 Bad interface DB S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 229 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FB88 PN_InOut FB90 PN_InOut_Fast continued Table 7 10 Codes for PN InOut FB88 and PN_InOut_Fast FB90 continued DONE ERROR STATUS Meaning 8090n S7 400 only Parameter assignment error An incorrect module address was specified the address points to an empty slot Note only with FB90 In the following cases the value 81814 is shown in STATUS job a In actual fact there is no communication The address points to a slot that contains a different module type The addressed module is configured for PROFINET CBA operation 80A1H only with FB90 Possible communications errors Station internal connection to addressed module being terminated The configuration limits for connections of the CPU has been exceeded The interface is being reinitialized 80B0u S7 300 only Block error The data record number is wrong This status can also occur after the following actions Cold or warm restart after power DOWN UP Cold or warm restart on the CPU 80B1H S7 300 only Block error Da
235. ns S7 Addressing Mode Option When you configure the FETCH ACTIVE WRITE ACTIVE modes you can select the addressing mode This specifies how the addresses will be interpreted in the FETCH WRITE call in the SIMATIC S7 station when accessing DBs e S7 addressing mode byte address e 5 addressing mode word address This makes it possible for applications to access S5 or S7 stations without needing to adapt the addresses This is particularly interesting for existing S5 applications than can be used unchanged to access S7 stations As default the addressing mode for access to SIMATIC S7 is set option selected System Memory You can access the following address areas in the system memory on the SIMATIC S7 PLC using FETCH or WRITE e Data blocks DB When accessing DBs remember that the highest DB number is 255 e Bit memory M MB MW MD e Process image input table I IB IW ID e Process image output table Q QB QW QD e O area inputs PIW PID PIB e O area outputs PQW PQD PQB e Counters C e Timers T Links to Other Systems The FETCH and WRITE modes supported on ISO transport connections and ISO on TCP or TCP connections can be used with any other device to access the S7 system memory areas To be able to use this type of access for example for PC applications you need to know the PDU structure of the jobs The required S7 or S5 headers for request and response frames are 16 bytes long and thei
236. ns 5 6 Configuring TCP Connection Properties Introduction When you create a connection in the New dialog you specify the connection type and as far as possible the connection partner When necessary you can adapt other connection partners that are set as default when you create a new connection as described below Opening the Dialog To call the dialog for special connection properties follow the steps outlined below 1 Select the required connection in the connection table 2 Select the menu option Edit gt Object Properties Result The Properties TCP Connection dialog appears Tabs The following tabs are available for TCP connections A 126 General Displays parameters that identify the connection Addresses Displays the local and remote address information Options Here you can decide whether or not you want to use the connection for one of the access types FETCH or WRITE Overview This is an overview of all the configured TCP connections of the selected S7 station with their parameters and the status of the connection Status Information This tab displays the current status information for the connection valid at the time the dialog is opened This information corresponds to that displayed by NCM diagnostics S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections 5 6 1 Specifying the Local Connec
237. ns Aktiengesellschaft Bereich A amp D Industrielle Kommunikation SIMATIC NET Postfach 4848 D 90327 Nuremberg Germany EMC Directive The SIMATIC NET S7 CPs listed above are designed for use in an industrial environment Area of Application Requirements Noise emission Noise immunity Industrial EN 61000 6 4 2001 EN 61000 6 2 2001 Explosion Protection Directive Complying with EN 60079 15 Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres Type of protection n x 113 6 EEx nA Il T4 KEMA 03ATEX1225 X S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 284 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 B Standards and Approvals for SIMATIC NET S7 CPs Note When using installing SIMATIC NET products in hazardous area zone 2 make absolutely sure that the associated conditions are adhered to You will find these conditions here e Inthe SIMATIC NET Manual Collection e On the Internet at the address http support automation siemens com WW view en 13702947 Machinery Directive The product remains a component in compliance with Article 4 2 of the EC Machinery Directive 89 392 EEC According to the directive on machines we are obliged to point out that this product is intended solely for installation in a machine Before the final product is started up it must be established that it conforms to the directive 89 392 EEC Installation Guidelines The product meets the requirements i
238. odes The following table 7 6 shows the condition codes formed by the DONE ERROR and STATUS parameters that must be evaluated by the user program The command results must also be evaluated in the RESULT1 2 parameters according to Table 7 7 Table 7 6 AG CNTRL Codes DONE ERROR STATUS Meaning 1 0 0000H A job CMD was transferred successfully to the CP for example RESET or a status was read successfully from the CP The RESULT1 2 parameters can be evaluated 0 0 0000n There has been no block call yet or the block was called with ACT 0 0 0 81814 Job active The block call must be repeated with the same parameters until DONE or ERROR is signaled 0 1 81834 No configuration or the service has not yet started on the Ethernet CP 0 1 81864 The ID parameter is invalid The permitted ID depends on the selected command see CMD parameter in Table 7 7 0 1 81874 The CMD parameter is invalid 0 1 81884 Sequence error in the ACT control Note this code does not occur in the product version of the CP firmware S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 212 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC10 AG_CNTRL Continued Table 7 6 AG _CNTRL Codes DONE ERROR STATUS Meaning 0 1 81894 The CP version firmware used does not support FC10 The code is set when you call a CP 3431 EX20 with firmware as of V1
239. oes not need to be specified S7 400 The general properties of the subfield types are described below in Section 6 6 A 170 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 6 6 Example Header Parameter 6 Programmed Communication Connections Subfield types Different parameters are required depending on the parameter field Each parameter is described by a subfield Which subfields are required is explained in the descriptions of the system data and the connection types in the previous sections Each subfield consists of the specific parameter section and the header 4 Byte The following excerpt from a CONF _DB illustrates the structure of a subfield based on the example of the SUBNET MASK subfield type Address Name Type Initial Value Comment 14 0 Sub field 2 STRUCT dl Subfield 2 type SUBNET_MASK 0 0 Sub field ID INT Subfield ID 2 0 Sub_field_len INT ee Total length of the subfield in bytes 4 0 STRUCT oo Parameter range of SUBNET_MASK 8 0 END _ STRUCT In total the following subfield types are available Table 6 10 Subfield Subfield type Subfield length Meaning of the Parameter ID 1 in bytes 1 SUB IP V4 4 4 IP address according to IPv4 2 SUB NETMASK 4 4 Subnet mask 3 SUB DNS NAME Length of DNS DNS name name 4 4 SUB DNS SERV ADDR 4 4 DNS server address SUB DEF RO
240. of destination network Follow the same steps as described for setting the gateway Tip You do not need to make these settings for the gateway if you select one of the following options e Start NCM Diagnostics from the Properties dialog of the CP e When setting up your module do not select the interface as PC internal local in Set PG PC Interface Node address gateway 2 here the index of the module Rack slot 0 4 Node address PROFIBUS address 12 Attachment of target Gateway attachment station MPI PROFIBUS AUTO MPI PROFIBUS AUTO S7 subnet ID of target network 0001 0001 Figure 8 5 Example of Settings with PC internal S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 270 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 8 NCM S7 Diagnostics 8 3 6 Other Ways of Starting Diagnostics Starting in the properties dialog of the connections 1 Select the PLC gt Activate Connection Status menu command to activate online access 2 Select the Special Diagnostics button in the Status Information tab Starting in the hardware configuration tool HW Config 1 With the S7 station online select the PLC gt Module Status menu command 2 Select the Special Diagnostics button in the dialog that is opened Note To operate several diagnostic connections at the same time you can start NCM S7 Diagnostics more than once You can also start NCM S7 Diagnostics twice wit
241. of the parameter field is invalid Parameter error The ID of the subfield is invalid S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FB55 IP_CONFIG continued Table 7 9 Condition Codes for FB55 IP_CONFIG continued 0 DONE ERROR r STATUS 8BO09n 8BOAnH 8BOBu 8BOCu 8BODu 8BOEux SBOFu 8B104 8B114 8B124 8B134 Meaning System error The connection does not exist Data error The content of the subfield is not correct Structure error A subfield exists twice Data error The parameter does not contain all the necessary parameters Data error The CONF_DB does not contain a parameter field for system data Data error structure error The CONF _DB type is invalid System error The CP does not have enough resources to process CONF_DB completely Data error Configuration by the user program is not set Data error The specified type of the parameter field is invalid Data error Too many connections were specified either in total or too many for a specific type for example only one E mail connection is possible CP internal error Further errors detected on the program interfaces within the CPU SFC errors O O O O O O O O O O O O O O ae o a i e i r a a a Se Se Sa a N 8F224 8F23H 8F244 8F25H4 8F28H 8F29H 8F30H 8F31H 8F32H 8F33H 8F3A
242. onfigured connections with specified partners If you want to restrict access to the precise set of partners you specify during connection configuration you simply need to activate access protection In this case you do not need to enter IP addresses in the list Remember however that on unspecified connections all other IP addresses unconfigured in the project engineering are unauthorized and are rejected This automatic restriction to configured IP addresses does not apply to the programmed connections mode IP access protection relates to all connection types handled using the IP protocol TCP ISO on TCP UDP e IP access protection for partners with specific IP addresses To allow IP access for specific IP addresses enter these IP addresses in the IP access control list The IP addresses you specify when you configure the connection always belong to the permitted IP addresses and do not therefore need to be entered explicitly in the IP ACL This also applies to IP addresses obtained dynamically over an E mail connection from a DNS server e IP access protection for partners with unspecified connections Passive connection establishment functions only with remote nodes that are entered in the IP ACL Notice You can view the IP ACI with NCM Diagnostics When IP access protection is activated remember that in the following special case the IP ACL is displayed as being empty and IP access protection as being deactivated
243. ontains no information about the end of a message and start of anew message The receiving station must therefore know how many bytes belong to a message and transfer an ANY pointer corresponding exactly to this length when FC AG_LRECYV is called Example if 100 bytes of data are always transferred the ANY pointer could appear as P DB100 DBX 0 0 Byte 100 If you want to receive data with a variable length follow the steps below Include information on the length of the user data in the frame before the actual user data Initially you should only evaluate the length information on the receiving station Fetch the appropriate length of user data in another receive job by specifying an ANY pointer of the required length on the FC interface for fetching the actual user data S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 4 SEND RECEIVE Interface in the User Program 4 4 2 Recommendations for Use with a High Communications Load Overview The points below will help you to avoid overload situations on your CPU when using the Ethernet CPs In particular when you replace an older CP with a newer CP and are then confronted with overload problems you should check your application for the pitfalls outlined below Known Problems Remedy The functions for sending and receiving FC5 FC6 FC50 FC60 or FC53 63 are often called cyclically in OB1 This leads to constant communication betw
244. or device mode S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 Length of the data area to be transferred in bytes The transfer of the data always begins with address 0 regardless of the configuration Please note that the IO address 0 with a length of 1 is included Controller mode e The highest configured address of the devices must be specified here The individual areas are not grouped together e The data is transferred in the order of the logical addresses as with PROFIBUS DP Device mode e The data is transferred in the order of the slots corresponding to the configuration of the input modules on the PROFINET lO controller line for this PROFINET IO device e Note Make sure that the length programmed here and the configuration of the PROFINET IO controller are consistent The entire data area length including any gaps is transferred for the device A 235 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC11 PNIO_ SEND continued Declara tion Possible Values Remarks DONE OUTPUT BOOL 0 This parameter indicates whether or not the 4 New data job was completed without errors accepted ERROR OUTPUT BOOL 0 Error code 1 Error STATUS OUTPUT WORD Status code See Table 7 11 Page A 237 CHECK _ OUTPUT BOOL 0 All IOCS setto Auxiliary bit that indicates whether or not it is lOCS
245. oratories Inc according to C UL508 Industrial Control Equipment e CSA C22 2 No 142 Process Control Equipment e UL 1604 Hazardous Location e CSA 213 Hazardous Location APPROVED for Use in e Cl 1 Div 2 GP A B C D T4A e Cl 1 Zone 2 GP IIC T4 e Cl 1 Zone 2 AEx nC IIC T4 ale AZ L O S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 286 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 B Standards and Approvals for SIMATIC NET S7 CPs 1 Warning Explosion Hazard Do not disconnect while circuit is live unless area is known to be non hazardous A Warning Explosion Hazard Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class l Division 2 Note This equipment is suitable for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D or non hazardous locations only Notice For devices with C PLUG memory The C PLUG memory module may only be inserted or removed when the power is off Note the following information Note The system must be set up according to the regulations of the NEC National Electrical Code When used in environments corresponding to Class I Division 2 see above the SIMATIC NET S7 CPs must be installed in an enclosure FM Approval Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611 Class I Division 2 Group A B C D T4 or Class Zone 2 Group IIC T4 APPROVED S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 287 C79000
246. ostic object the messages are read out and displayed The latest message is displayed in the top line with the highest consecutive number If you double click a previously selected event message you display a help text explaining the message in greater detail Note The event messages in the ring buffer of the CPs are deleted following power cycle OFF ON S7 CPs or after booting PC stations When necessary use the option of logging to a file if you want to see the history of the event messages later For more detailed information refer to the online help on the Diagnostic buffer diagnostic object S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 A 273 8 NCM S7 Diagnostics Table 8 4 Mode Dependent Functions Diagnostic Functions Diagnostic Object Connections Connections gt Type Connections gt Type gt Type connection n Diagnostic Aims To display and monitor communication connections You obtain an overview or detailed information in the contents area depending on the diagnostic object you select Special Features Overview of All Connection Types Used Overview of all the communication connections of a particular type for example all TCP connections Information on the connection status By double clicking the objects in the contents area you can display detailed information Detailed informatio
247. otocol Port Number Service TCP FTP TCP SMTP 25 TCP RFC1006 TCP RPC DCOM UDP SNMP _ REQUEST UDP 34964 PN IO UDP 65534 NTP UDP 65535 NTP S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 139 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections Addresses Tab Unspecified UDP Connection An unspecified UDP connection can be used in two ways e Free UDP Connection To configure a free UDP connection select the Address assignment in block check box The input boxes for the remote IP address and the remote port are then deactivated since the destination addresses are now specified by the user program e Connection to a remote station in a different project You can specify the remote IP address and the port for any destination station The destination station can be in the current STEP 7 project or in another project Please note Since no connection is actually established with UDP datagram service communication on the configured UDP connection is only possible when the partner addresses IP address and port are specified Properties UDP Connection E4 General Addresses Options Overview Status Information The ports are walid in the range from 1 to 65535 A value higher than 1024 ts recommended since the well known ports are located in the range up to 1024 Local Remote IF dec 140 80 0 2 PURT dec Cancel Help Figure 5
248. oute button see Section 5 9 If no CP is assigned for example because the CP was previously deleted none is displayed here With this option you specify whether the connection is established by Modifiable this S7 station This is the default setting when the address of the partner is specified ON the connection is established actively OFF the connection is established by the partner If you selected partner unspecified when you created the connection the option is deselected as default If you activate the option you must also specify the address of the partner in the Addresses tab Note Please note the effects on the mode If you want to use the FETCH or WRITE mode refer to the Options tab the mode must be set to Passive for the S7 station This value must be entered as a block call parameter ID for calling Display only the FC in the user program to identify the connection The ID changes if the local ID is changed This value must be entered as a block call parameter ID for calling Display only the FC in the user program to identify the connection Connection Name Reference Only in Multiproject If you create a connection to a partner in another project that has not yet been merged with the current multiproject you must specify a connection name as a Zz reference not to be confused with the name of the connection endpoint described above Interproject conn
249. p as an object with one or more bus attachments The following distinction is made according to the communication functionality gt PROFINET devices and gt PROFIBUS devices Interconnection General Logical data connection between two objects With PROFINET CBA in SIMATIC iMap Connection between two technological functions An output is interconnected with an input of the same type Interconnections are represented in SIMATIC iMap by lines Network view With PROFINET CBA View of the devices and the networks Ethernet PROFIBUS in SIMATIC iMap Plant view With PROFINET CBA View of the technological functions of the automation system and its interconnections in SIMATIC iMap One chart is displayed in the plant view PROFIBUS device In PROFINET CBA A PROFIBUS device has only one PROFIBUS attachment as a Slave It does not take part directly in PROFINET communication but is linked using a proxy PROFINET device S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 300 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 D Glossary PROFINET Within the framework of Totally Integrated Automation TIA PROFINET is the consistent continuation of PROFIBUS DP the established fieldbus and Industrial Ethernet the communications bus for the cell level The experience gained in both systems was and is integrated in PROFINET PROFINET as an Ethernet based automation standard from PROFIBUS International previously PROFIBUS Users Orga
250. ple the CP 443 1 you can reset the CP memory This function must be confirmed before it is executed Following this memory reset the CP retains the preset MAC address and the retentive parameters The CP is therefore immediately ready for downloads The retentive parameters include e P address and IP parameters e Anewly set MAC address e LAN settings With some modules it is possible to reset to the factory settings When you reset to the factory settings the retentive parameters are also deleted After this the module retains only the factory set MAC address as shipped Here you will see information on the C PLUG inserted in the module The C PLUG can be deleted and formatted for use in the module View gt Update Each time you activate this menu command the displayed diagnostic and status information is updated once View gt Update Cyclically Using this menu command you activate and deactivate the automatic cyclic off updating of the displayed diagnostic and status information You can set the interval between update points with the menu command Options gt Customize S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 A 263 8 NCM S7 Diagnostics Table 8 1 Meaning of the Menu Commands Menu Meaning Options gt Customize With this menu command you set the general parameters for the diagnostic session e Dialog update time
251. project 2 PROFIBUS 1 am A S7 300 1 S7 300 2 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 43 C79000 G8976 C182 08 1 Communication via Ethernet CPs in S7 Stations Organization in a Multiproject If you use a multiproject organization follow the steps below to connect the J 9 S7 400 1 station to the PROFIBUS 1 subnet Create a subnet of the type PROFIBUS in both subprojects and merge these two subnets in NetPro Representative Objects for Stations Outside the Current Project If you do not want to use the multiproject functions you can fall back on the use of representative objects as used previously To be able to network the representative objects you must once again create a subnet of the tyoe PROFIBUS in both projects as shown in the example here S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 44 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 1 Communication via Ethernet CPs in S7 Stations 1 7 6 Network Project Variant Connections between Subnets TCP IP Configuration of the System If connections are required to stations on network structures connected by routers due to the differing tasks of the stations or the large span of the network the stations in the other project can be reached by configuring Other Stations S7 400 1 A Ethernet 1 WAN Internet Ethernet 2 S7 400 2 S7 300 1 mii ER only TCP IP If the sta
252. ption in the Properties dialog in STEP 7 and in the catalog in HW Config S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 6 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 This manual The Documentation in the S7 CPs NCM S7 Documentation Package and on the Internet You can order this manual along with other documents in a manual package Order no German 6GK7080 0AA01 8AAO Order no English 6GK7080 0AA01 8BAO The following table provides you with an overview of the content and the addresses for downloading from the Web Title Content Web Addresses Configuring and This is available on the Web at Commissioning S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet General section http support automation siemens com WW view en 8777865 Device descriptions e CP 343 1 Lean CX00 http support automation siemens com WW view en 19308657 CP 343 1 Lean CX10 http support automation siemens com WW view en 23643456 CP 343 1 EX21 http support automation siemens com WW view en 22259495 CP 343 1 EX30 http support automation siemens com WW view en 24485272 CP 343 1 Advanced http support automation siemens com WW view en 20736149 CP 343 1 EX20 EX11 http support automation siemens com WW view en 8777308 CP 343 1 PN http support automation siemens com WW view en 8776538 CP 343 1 IT http support automation siemens com WW view en 8776544 Manual CP 443 1 EX11 http support
253. r Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 A 253 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs Declara tion Possible Values Remarks ID OUTPUT WORD Logical start address of the PNIO component that triggers the alarm module or submodule For an output module bit 15 is set example of output address 5 ID DW 16 8005 For a mixed module the lower of the two addresses is specified LEN OUTPUT INT Length of the received alarm information AINFO MODE IN OUT DWORD 0 Reserved TINFO IN OUT ANY as The address of the data task information VARTYPE area points to one of the Destination area for the alarm pnts alternatives management information nee e Memory bit area The error OB start information OB e Data block area header byte 0 19 of TINFO is DWORD aje The length of the ANY reproduced as far as possible by the permitted pointer must be gt 32 CP firmware bytes See also 1 AINFO IN OUT ANY as The address of the data alarm information VARTYPE area points to one of the Destination area for header BYTE alternatives information and additional alarm WORD e Memory bit area information If the ANY pointer AINFO Aer Data block area is too low the information will be truncated are The length of the ANY 1 permitted pointer must be greater See also than or equal to the maximum additional alarm informa
254. r from other Windows applications Print Function in the Overview Tab An additional function for printing the configured connections and configuration status is available in the Overview tab of the properties dialog of the connection A 106 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 3 4 Overview 5 Configuring Communication Connections Connections Without Assignment This section explains the actions that can lead to a configured connection losing its assignment to the CP or being deleted Caution Remember that in contrast to the S7 connections the connections of the SEND RECEIVE interface are assigned a CP dependent ID The actions below may require the ID to be modified so that the interface information in the user program must also be adapted Notice If you replace one CP with another this must provide at least the same services and have at least the same version This is the only way to ensure that the connections configured over the CP remain consistent and can be used Table 5 3 Actions That Can Cause Changes to Configured Connections Action The CP module is moved to a different location in the hardware configuration drag and drop Consequences for the Connections The connections are retained The connection IDs are automatically updated How to Establish the Connection Again The CP module is deleted in t
255. r structure is described in the Appendix S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 151 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections Messages in the Diagnostic Buffer A 152 As a result of FETCH WRITE access negative acknowledgments from the S7 CPU are possible This then leads to corresponding connection oriented entries in the diagnostic buffer that you can read out with NCM Diagnostics see Section 8 5 Table 5 8 Message Coding in the Diagnostic Buffer with FETCH WRITE Coding Meaning O14 Hardware fault 03H Object access is not permitted 05H Invalid address syntax ID area type bit number 06H Data type not currently supported O74 Data type is not consistent OAH The object does not exist or the end of the area has been excee ded FFH Internal protocol error S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections 5 9 Routing to Distribute Load Routing to Distribute Load If more than one CP of the same type exists in a station and is connected to the same subnet the route can be selected Click the Route button in the General tab to display the route dialog Route X Local Partner SIMATIC 400 Station 1 CPU 414 101 SIMATIC 400 5 tation 2 CPU 41 4 1 7 Via CP LP 443 1 R054 EP 443 1 ADS 4 CP 443 1
256. rameter Field for a UDP Connection Type 2 Identifier for the connection type Freely assignable connection reference pe eva must be specified in AG_SEND AG_RECV Subfield 1 ID connection ID Range of values for the connection ID Subfield 2 e 7 400 1 2 through 64 e 7 300 1 2 through 16 Subfield n Usable Subfields Table 6 6 Subfield Parameter ID Type Special Features Notes Use Please refer also to the general description in Table 6 10 Page A 171 mandatory optional 1 SUB _IP_V4 IP address of the partner m 9 SUB LOC PORT m 10 SUB REM PORT m 18 SUB CONNECT NAME O 19 SUB LOC MODE O 21 SUB _KBUS ADR This value is always set to 2 for CPs for m for the S7 300 and does not need to be S7 400 specified 23 SUB _ADDR_IN_ DATABLOCK If the Free UDP connection is selected O for this parameter the parameters SUB_IP_V4 and SUB_REM_PORT are omitted The general properties of the subfield types are described below in Section 6 6 A 166 Note Please read the description of the configurable connection properties for the for the UDP connection in Section 5 7 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 6 5 3 Structure Type 3 ID connection ID No of subfields n Subfield 1 Subfield 2 e 7 400 1 2 through 64 e 7 300 1 2 through 16 Subfield n Usable Subfields
257. range up to 1024 Local Remote IF dec 140 80 0 1 140 80 2 PORT dec 2000 FE JF eal al E Cancel Help Figure 5 22 Layout of the Properties Dialog Addresses Tab for the Broadcast Mode S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 A 143 5 Configuring Communication Connections Addresses Tab Connection to all Multicast Nodes By selecting all multicast nodes as the connection partner you specify that e sent UDP frames are delivered to all multicast nodes of the multicast group e the local device receives multicast frames in the specified multicast group The multicast group is specified using the IP address and the port addresses In the Addresses tab an IP address in the network valid for multicast groups is proposed for the partner under IP address IP When using multicast the partner is always a group of receivers multicast group You must enter a PORT address suitable for all partners you want to reach under PORT In principle is it possible to address several multicast groups with one IP address To achieve this you can create several UDP connections with the same IP address but different PORT addresses nsert Hew Connection Properties UDP connection General Addresses Options Overview Status Information Connection Partner I In the current project Sa E EEE e alae HRA SIMATIC 4
258. rding its use The following points apply e The interface parameters are identical e For FB90 there are several additional codes in the STATUS parameter e With some errors there are different codes in the STATUS parameter of FB88 and FB90 e There are differences in the configuration limits of the interface DB see relevant manual S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 227 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FB88 PN_InOut FB90 PN_InOut_Fast continued Note For more detailed information on handling the interface DB refer to the SIMATIC iMap documentation 19 Notice When you reload user program blocks data consistency is only guaranteed if the CPU is first changed to STOP How supplied block library FB88 and FB90 are supplied with SIMATIC iMap There are different block types for S7 300 and S7 400 After installation the blocks are available in the PROFINET Library under PROFINET System Library CP300 or CP400 Call Interface Call interface in FBD representation FB88 FB90 LADDR Call example in STL representation STL Explanation Call FB 88 DB88 Block call with instance DB88 LADDR w 16 0120 DONE M 99 1 ERROR M 99 0 STATUS MW 104 Explanation of the Formal Parameters The following table explains all the formal parameters for FB88 FB90 S7 CPs for Industria
259. rds counter words counter cell 1 word cell 1 word 1 256 1 1 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 A 305 F Document History This section provides an overview of the previous releases of this manual and the functional expansions in STEP 7 and NCM S7 New in release 07 STEP7 V5 4 SP2 C79000 G8976 C182 07 Apart from various adaptations to the currently available devices the following modifications were included e Configuration of the CP mode PROFINET IO device or controller Certain CP 343 1 device types can be operated in the PROFINET IO controller or PROFINET IO device modes e Additional information in the block description New blocks for user programs of the CP 343 1 in the PROFINET IO controller mode FB52 PNIO_RW_REC FB54 PNIO ALARM e Introduction of Web diagnostics for the new CP 343 1 types New in release 06 STEP7 V5 4 SP1 C79000 G8976 C182 06 Apart from various adaptations to the currently available devices and the current version of STEP 7 NCM S7 V5 4 SP1 the following modifications were included e Configuration of the CP mode PROFINET IO device Depending on the device type certain CPs can be configured and operated in the PROFINET IO controller or PROFINET IO device modes e Corrections and additions to the block description Corrections and additions have been made to the following FCs FBs FC11 PNIO S
260. record or write data record function is controlled by the WRITE REC parameter Example The CP can be informed of the location ID and plant designation using the write data record function This is done using the maintenance data record IM1 with index AFF1y You will find details of the supported data records and their structure at the following Internet address http support automation siemens com WW view en 19289930 Call Interface Call interface in FBD representation PNIO_RW_REC CPLADDR WRITE_REC T DONE ERROR STATUS RECORD S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 247 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs Example in STL representation STL Explanation CALL FB 52 DB 52 PNIO_RW_REC block call read write data record CPLADDR W 16 0110 Module address from hardware configuration WRITE _REC M 1 1 TRUE write data record FALSE read data record ID WH16 86A Logical address of the module to be addressed INDEX W 16 8000 Data record number DONE M 1 3 Address for return parameter DONE ERROR M 1 1 Address for return parameter ERROR STATUS MW 12 Address for return parameter STATUS LEN MW 16 Length of the data record that was read or will be written in bytes RECORD P DB3 DBX0 0 BYTE 80 Destination or source of the data record to be transferred here max 80
261. ring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 A 99 5 Configuring Communication Connections Tasks of the Ethernet CP When handling the data transfer on a connection the Ethernet CP has the following tasks e When receiving Receiving data from Ethernet and transferring it to the user data area on the CPU e When sending Taking data from the user data area on the CPU and sending the data via Ethernet The connection is established automatically as soon as the partner is obtainable For a free UDP connection the following functions are also necessary in addition to those above e When receiving Entry of the sender of the message in the job header e When sending Evaluation of the job header and addressing the partner Requirements for Configuring Connections The Ethernet CP was entered in the hardware configuration and connected to the subnet As a bus node the Ethernet CP has an address Notice All stations not in the STEP 7 project must be configured with substitute objects for example as SIMATIC S5 or Other stations or Use the unspecified partner type when you create the connection S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 100 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections 5 3 1 New Connection Principle When you create new connections you start from entered and networked stations A connection is
262. rmware version V2 0 or higher 6GK7 343 1GX20 0XE0 version 1 or higher firmware version V1 0 or higher modules are replaced Module replacement in this sense means the replacement of a module with another module that may be a more recent version Notice Please remember that if you replace a module you must only use the blocks permitted for the configured CP type in the user program This means e If you replace the module without adapting the configuration data to the possibly newer module type you do not need to make any changes to the blocks used e Ifyou replace the module and you do adapt the configuration data to the newer module type you must use the block versions approved for this module type We recommend that you always use the latest block versions for all module types With the older module types this recommendation assumes that you are using the latest firmware for the particular block type You will find more information on replacing blocks in our Customer Support on the Internet The manuals for specific devices 2 contain information on the compatibility of the S7 CPs and the corresponding blocks FCs FBs S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 177 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs 7 2 Setting Parameters for FC Calls Before describing the FCs in detail a few general comments on calling and setting parameter
263. rnet CPs in S7 Stations 1 7 2 Network Project Variant SIMATIC S5 and Non SIMATIC Devices on the Subnet Configuration of the System In addition to SIMATIC S7 stations SIMATIC S5 stations and non SIMATIC devices can be included in your system S7 400 1 ill Ethernet 1 S7 300 1 m Non SIMATI SIMATIC 5 mm i S7 300 2 View in a STEP 7 Project SIMATIC S5 stations you intend to include in the communication can be selected directly Non SIMATIC devices must be entered in the configuration as Other stations R SIMATIC Hanager Fertigung lt Off_line gt Projekt G GDESETOP4ncm4icab S 7 Pro Handbuchika Ep Datei Bearbeiten Einf gen leleystem Anaicht Extras Fenster Hilfe x olele ele a E RRE El Fertigung w S7 400 1 c e S 7 3001 g 57 3002 of 4001 af of 002 Andere MPl Nete 1 Ethernet 1 Station SIMATIC 551 wae NETPRO Netz konfigurieren Netz zu Projekt G GDESKTOP4 ncm4icab 7 Proj Handbuchik jie E3 a Netz Bearbeiten Einfugen Zleleystem Ansicht Estras Fenster Hilfe x Dr cken Sie S zae ea ER AE FEN R k S7 400 S7 300 CPU CP CPUJCP 414 fds pun 313 345 o o E Ethernet 1 Industrial Ethernet ee SIMATIC S5 1 tag CPUTCR RE 313 343 E oO Oo 7 Bereit E Z S7 CPs for Industrial Ethe
264. rnet Configuring and Commissioning A 38 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 1 Communication via Ethernet CPs in S7 Stations 1 7 3 Network Project Variant Two or More Subnets One Project Configuration of the System Due to the different tasks of the stations or due to the extent of the system it may be necessary to operate more than one network I Ethernet 1 System Production and i Management Level S7 400 2 I wa PROFIBUS 1 a Se S7 300 1 S7 300 2 View in a STEP 7 Project You can create the subnets in one STEP 7 project and configure the stations for communication Ka SIMATIC Manager Anlage lt Offline gt Projekt G GDESKTOP ncm4icab 57 Proj Mel Fa Ep Datei Bearbeiten Eimtugen leleystem Ansicht Extras Fenster Hille a l x deke ae wal ea es E a Anlage ao 02 MPFI Metz 1 ii f boot earned parca f i 3 f 57 4001 57 4002 S5r 30071 57 30 PROFIBLUS 1 57 4001 Sr 400 2 ofa SF S002 a Drucken Sie F1 um Hilfe zu erhalten o ZA This representation illustrates the following e More than one subnet can be managed in one project e Each station is created once in the project e Each station can be assigned to more than one subnet by assigning its CPs to different subnets S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 39 C79000 G8976 C182 08 1 Communication vi
265. rnet Configuring and Commissioning A 78 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with Requirements 3 4 1 Before you can use the addressing described here the CP must be obtainable online which means e An attachment to the Ethernet LAN must already exist there must be no routers between subnets in the path e The Ethernet port of your PG PC must be accessible to STEP 7 Notice The options for assigning an address as described here are available only if you have a module that can be reached using the default MAC address such modules must support the PST Primary Setup Tool function Please refer to the information in the relevant manual 2 Addressing by Selecting the Target System in the SIMATIC Manager Follow the steps below to assign the IP address the first time 1 Open the SIMATIC Manager 2 Select the menu command PLC gt Assign Ethernet Address 3 Start a network search for available modules by selecting the Browse button 4 Select the CP with the matching MAC address from the components listed 5 Enter the required IP parameters and assign them to the CP Result The CP is now accessible on Industrial Ethernet using the IP address Note You will find further detailed information on this procedure in the STEP 7 online help S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 79 C79000 G8976 C182 08 3 Operating the Ethernet CP wi
266. roblem or task using the check list in Section 8 6 and select the diagnostic function based on the recommendation there S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 272 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 8 5 8 NCM S7 Diagnostics Starting Diagnostic Functions Explicitly The following table shows the diagnostic options that exist in the available functions Table 8 3 General Diagnostic and Statistical Functions Diagnostic Functions Diagnostic Object CP information Diagnostic Aims The aim is to identify the CP to which NCM 7 Diagnostics is connected and to find out the current mode Special Features Mode Here the aim is to find out the current operating mode of the Ethernet CP asa module in the S7 300 400 and as a node on Industrial Ethernet and if necessary to modify the mode menu command Operating Mode gt Stop Module Start Module Reset Memory Reset to Factory Settings Diagnostic buffer General error diagnostics using diagnostic buffers To display and decode event messages recorded on the CP in detail The diagnostic buffer provides you with detailed information about all the communication services of the CP Event messages are recorded on the CP in a ring buffer The ring buffer can contain up to 50 entries In NCM S7 on the other hand up to 500 messages can be saved All the CP functions can generate event messages When you call the diagn
267. rom this graphic representation you can also activate all the functions for networking and configuring connections with the Ethernet CPs You can also create the subnets in NetPro Open the catalog using the menu command Insert gt Network Objects Organization in a Multiproject If you use the multiproject form of organization this has the following effects when ALE 9 creating subnets You create subnets initially in the subprojects as described above To be able to network S7 stations you will for example need to create a suitable subnet of the type Industrial Ethernet in each subproject If this is physically a subnet that extends beyond the boundaries of the subproject you should first merge the subnets before configuring the communication connections between the S7 stations If you do not merge the subnets NetPro assumes that you are connecting the subnets via routers and displays warning messages to this effect Properties of Merged Subnets Multiproject When you merge subnets transferable subnet properties such as the subnet ID of the master subnet will be transferred to the other subnets of the group Some parameters relate specifically to a subproject and remain unchanged these include for example descriptive parameters such as the name author and any comments S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 57 C79000 G8976 C182 08 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with
268. rror 1 0 81834 e PROFINET IO configuration missing or e wrong CPLADDR or e The CP is in STOP mode Extra in device mode e The connection between PROFINET IO controller and PROFINET IO device is down or e PROFINET IO controller not reachable or e Total lengths configuration and LEN parameter are not consistent 81844 System error or illegal parameter type lt F 9 gt 1 81854 Destination buffer RECV is too short 8F22H Area length error reading a parameter e g DB too short 8F23H Area length error writing a parameter e g DB too short 8F24H Area error reading a parameter 8F254 Area error writing a parameter 8F28H Alignment error reading a parameter 8F29H Alignment error writing a parameter 8F30H Parameter is in the write protected 1st act data block 8F31H Parameter is in the write protected 2nd act data block 8F32H Parameter contains a DB number that is too high 8F3AH Destination area is not loaded DB O o aoa aoa a a a a a o O O O 8F424 Timeout reading a parameter from the I O area S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 243 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC 12 PNIO_RECV continued Table 7 12 Condition Codes PNIO_RECV continued NDR ERROR STATUS Meaning 0 Timeout writing a parameter to the I O area 0 Address of the parameter to be read is disa
269. rties A 116 E E mail connection Parameter field for A 168 Ethernet overview A 16 Ethernet CP commissioning steps A 55 further CP properties A 64 time A 65 F FB A 175 CP_CONFIG A 155 IP_CONFIG A 220 FCs for access coordination with FETCH WRITE A 202 FETCH WRITE services configuration for ISO transport A 149 overview A 34 Firmware Loader application A 279 loading firmware A 280 FM approval A 287 FTP connection Parameter field for A 170 Functions AG RECV A 86 A 87 AG SEND A 86 A 87 Functions FC typical sequence A 88 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 310 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 Functions FCs AG RECV AG_LRECV AG_SRECV A 194 AG SEND AG_LSEND AG_SSEND A 186 AG_LOCK A 204 AG_LOCK AG_UNLOCK A 202 AG_UNLOCK A 207 block number A 175 for configured connections A 181 general notes A 175 Further functions A 106 H Hardware configuration Ethernet CP A 59 Industrial Ethernet overview A 16 Industrial Ethernet user interface to A 27 Installation guidelines A 285 IP access control list A 69 IP access protection A 68 IP address in the A 70 obtaining from a DHCP server A 70 setting in the user program A 70 IP address assignment over DHCP A 104 IP configuration A 70 IP ACL Siehe IP access control list ISO transport connection A 110 amount of data and number of connections A 98 checking A 118 connection wit
270. s a station with FETCH or WRITE functions a FETCH passive or WRITE passive connection must be configured on the SIMATIC S7 CPU The following types are possible e ISO Transport e SO on TCP e TCP Coordinating Access Using the User Program You can use the FCs AG_LOCK and AG_UNLOCK to coordinate access With these FCs you can coordinate access to system data areas by enabling and disabling the connections so that no inconsistent data is created and transferred SIMATIC S5 On the SIMATIC S5 station the FETCH WRITE services are configured and started by READ ACTIVE PASSIVE and WRITE ACTIVE PASSIVE S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 34 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 1 Communication via Ethernet CPs in S7 Stations 1 7 Networking Stations with STEP 7 Configuring To allow stations to communicate with each other the networks must be configured in the STEP 7 projects Configuring a network or subnet involves the following 1 You create one or more subnets of the required subnet type in the project 2 You select the properties of the subnet Normally the default settings are adequate 3 You connect the station logically to the subnet 4 You set up connections for communication Networking in a Multiproject STEP 7 as of Version V5 2 supports configuration in a multiproject f l 2 Using a multiproject for example you can create a project for distributed editing by var
271. s always necessary The data is transferred to the communication partner in segments of 240 bytes The status code in the output parameters DONE ERROR and STATUS is updated in each block call and can be evaluated User program Ethernet CP Communications Partner CPU cycle Supply AG_SEND with T 1 ob active Transfer of field 1 active over Ethernet Data record X is Supply AG_SEND transferred in ACT 0 segments AG ND ob active Transfer of field 2 active over Ethernet A END la ob active Transfer of field n 1 active over Ethernet ob activ i Transfer of field n active over Ethernet ob completed withollit error Time Time Time Legend 1 Parameter transfer DONE ERROR STATUS S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 189 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC5 AG SEND FC50 AG _LSEND FC53 AG_SSEND continued Note In principle it is possible to call the FC more than once within the CPU cycle to speed up the handling of the job Do not forget however that this increases the load during the CPU cycle the load differs depending on the CPU type Explanation of the Formal Parameters Parameter The following table explains all the formal parameters for the AG_SEND AG_LSEND AG_SSEND functions Declara tion Possible Values Remarks ACT INPUT BOOL 0 1 If
272. s for FCs will be useful at this point It is possible to make the following general statements about the following parameter groups that occur in all FCs e Parameters for CP and connection assignment input parameters e Parameters for specifying a CPU data area input parameters e Status information output parameters Calling Communication Blocks for an S7 300 7 2 1 A 178 Caution The communication blocks for S7 300 SIMATIC NET block libraries for S7 300 in STEP 7 must not be called in more than one priority class If for example you call a communication block in OB1 and in OB35 block execution could be interrupted by the higher priority OB If you call blocks in more than one OB you must write your program so that a communication block that is currently executing cannot be interrupted by another communication block for example by disabling enabling SFC interrupts Parameters for CP and Connection Assignment input parameters When you call an FC you transfer the module start address of the Ethernet CP in the CPLADDR or LADDR parameter The module start address of the Ethernet CP can be found in the properties dialog of the CP in the Address Input tab can be selected in the SIMATIC Manager or in HW Config With connection oriented jobs you must also reference the connection to be used by its connection ID You will find this in the properties dialog of the connection under Block parameters refer to
273. s for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 244 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs Relationship between Block Call and IO Data e Operation as PROFINET IO controller As a PROFINET IO controller the CP does not monitor the cyclic calls of the PNIO_SEND RECV blocks If the blocks are not called the last transferred IO data and IOCS IOPS data are taken as valid e Operation as PROFINET IO device FC11 and FC12 each have their own watchdog Depending on the CPU cycle time the connection to the PROFINET IO controller is terminated if one of the two blocks is no longer called following the initialization phase Optimizing data transfer only when operating as PROFINET IO controller 7 8 4 Block call It is possible to call the blocks with a length LEN parameter that is shorter than the configured total length of the IO data on the PNIO chain You can use this so that time critical data is transferred in every CPU cycle whereas non critical data is not transferred in every cycle Example You could for example transfer only the first data area time critical data in every cycle and the total length of the configured IO data in every second cycle To do this you must place the time critical data in the lower area starting at IO address 0 during configuration Data Consistency The entire input or output data area of the PNIO controller is always tr
274. s from a DHCP server it is initially not possible to create a fully specified connection in the STEP 7 project because the local IP address is not Known You must therefore select unspecified with passive connection establishment as the connection type S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 104 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections The following table lists the possible options Table 5 2 Meaning for Connection IP Address TSAP Port Possible Connection Establishment MAC Address Establishment by any partner empty empty passive by any partner via specific TSAP empty specified passive to or by a specific partner specified specified active passive The free UDP connection is another variant With this type of connection the address of the connection partner is left open during configuration The communication nodes are identified by address information in the communication job in the user program For further information refer to the sections dealing with specific connections Notice The number of connections possible per Ethernet CP can be found in the manual 2 supplied with the CP If several CPs are installed in one station the next CP is automatically selected if the limit is exceeded The connections can be routed in the Properties dialog of the connection S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Rel
275. s remain available e PG connection via PROFIBUS or Industrial Ethernet If the PG is connected to the LAN PROFIBUS or Industrial Ethernet in order to execute PG functions on the S7 400 CPU and diagnostics on an S7 400 CP only one connection resource on the S7 400 CPU is necessary S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 51 C79000 G8976 C182 08 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with STEP 7 NCM S7 To attach a SIMATIC station to Industrial Ethernet via the Ethernet CP configure the CP with the NCM 7 configuration software The chapter explains the following e How the CP is configured in the STEP 7 project e How the various network configurations are managed setting up access to other systems e How to control and supply the CP with data using NCM S7 Yv You will find further information in the following sources e When installing the Ethernet CP please read the instructions in the device specific Part B of this manual This also contains further information about the performance of the Ethernet CP e For more information about the functions and applications of STEP 7 in which the NCM S7 option is integrated please read the following topics For using the help functions read the section Working with STEP 7 in 6 Configuring and assigning parameters to modules in 6 Configuring networks in 6 You will find this information in the online help with integrated in STEP 7 by sel
276. s too high 0 DB number error 0 1 8F3An Destination area not loaded DB 0 Timeout writing a parameter to the I O area 0 Address of the parameter to be read is disabled in the accessed rack 0 Internal error e g illegal ANY reference 0 e No module with this address exists or the CPU is in STOP mode e The FC used does not match the system family being used different FCs must be used for S7 300 and S7 400 0 80914 Module start address not at a double word boundary 0 80924 In the ANY reference a type other than BYTE is specified S7 400 only 0 Zo 80A0n Negative acknowledgment reading from the module 0 1 80A4H The communication bus connection between the CPU and CP is not established 0 el 80B0n The module does not recognize the data record 0 C 80B14 Destination area invalid 80B2H The communication bus connection between the CPU and CP is not established The data record cannot be read aa There are too many jobs pending 1 80C3H CPU resources memory occupied oO O O Oj O S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 200 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC6 AG_RECV FC60 AG_LRECV FC63 AG_SRECV continued Table 7 3 Condition Codes for AG_RECV AG LRECV AG_SRECV NDR ERROR STATUS Meaning 0 1 80CC44 Communication error occurs temporarily and a repetition in the user program wi
277. self make certain that no injury to persons nor damage to equipment can result in your plant or process EU Directive Do not start up until you have established that the machine on which you intend to run this component complies with the directive 89 392 EEC Correct Usage of Software Products Note the following Warning This software may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only in connection with software products devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens Before you use the supplied sample programs or programs you have written yourself make certain that no injury to persons nor damage to equipment can result in your plant or process S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 3 C79000 G8976 C182 08 Prior to Startup Before putting the product into operation note the following warning Caution Prior to startup you must observe the instructions in the relevant documentation For ordering data of the documentation please refer to the catalogs or contact your local SIEMENS representative Copyright Siemens AG 2001 2007 All rights reserved The reproduction transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority Offenders will be liable for damages All rights including rights created by patent grant or registration of
278. sses Tab Unspecified ISO on TCP Connection If you select the partner type as unspecified depending on your task you can enter address information about the communication partner here The options available to you are explained in detail in Section 5 3 1 The Addresses tab shown here illustrates the situation in which the remote IP address and the remote TSAP were not specified If you make no further entries you are accepting connection establishment from any communication partner Properties 150 on TCP Connection E3 General Local IP dec 140 850 0 2 TSAP ASC TS5AF hes TSAF length Fi TCP 54 43 50 20 31 Addresses Options Overview status Information m Cancel Help Figure 5 13 Layout of the Addresses Tab of the Properties Dialog for an Unspecified Connection A 124 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections 5 5 3 Checking ISO on TCP Connection Properties Overview Tab The overview shows all the configured ISO on TCP connections and their parameters cannot be modified here You can adjust the width of the columns in the table For an example of this display refer to Section 5 3 4 the ISO transport connection Parameter Description Local ID This is the connection ID of the ISO on TCP connection STEP 7 connection configuration DWORD Name loc En
279. sts of the following e CP specific index dialogs that you call using the properties dialog box of the modules e Dialogs for the connection configuration e Diagnostic functions that you obtain as follows Using the Diagnostics tab in the properties dialog Using the standard Start menu of Windows with which you can call the SIMATIC program group e Functions displayed with SIMATIC gt NCM in the Start menu of Windows Diagnostics Help for functions FCs Readme file with current information about NCM Firmware loader Access to Online Help of STEP 7 and NCM S7 With the online help you can obtain the following information e You can display the contents of the STEP 7 basic help system with the Help gt Contents menu command e Context sensitive help on the selected object using the Help gt Context Sensitive Help menu command the F1 key or the question mark in toolbar You can then access further information relating to the current topic e Glossary for all STEP 7 applications by clicking the Glossary button Please note that each STEP 7 application has its own contents and context sensitive help S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 54 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with 3 3 Configuring Follow the Steps Below A CP is managed in an S7 project just as the other modules You use STEP 7 to configure the hardware and create
280. t 000000 A 111 5 4 2 Specifying ISO Transport Addresses ccc eee eee A 113 5 4 3 Specifying ISO Transport Dynamic Properties A 116 5 4 4 Checking ISO Transport Connection Properties A 118 5 5 Configuring ISO on TCP Connections Properties A 119 5 5 1 Specifying the Local Connection Endpoint 20000 A 120 5 5 2 Specifying ISO on TCP Addresses 0 000 cece nen eee A 122 5 53 Checking ISO on TCP Connection Properties A 125 5 6 Configuring TCP Connection Properties 000 cena A 126 5 6 1 Specifying the Local Connection Endpoint 00000 A 127 5 6 2 specifying TCP Addresses 0 00 cc ccc eee ee ees A 129 5 6 3 Checking TCP Connection Properties 00 cee ene eae A 133 5 7 Configuring UDP Connection Properties 000 ee eee A 134 5 7 1 Specifying the Local Connection Endpoint 20000 A 135 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 12 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 7 2 5 7 3 5 7 4 5 7 5 5 8 5 9 6 Programmed Communication Connections 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 5 1 6 5 2 6 5 3 6 5 4 6 5 5 6 6 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs General Notes on FCs FBS 000 cece a aa 7 1 7 2 7 2 1 7 2 2 7 2 3 7 3 7 3 1 7 3 2 7 4 7 4 1 7 4 2 7 9 7 6 1 1
281. t be specified in the Properties dialog Connections to Partners in Other Projects There are various ways of creating connections to partners configured in other STEP 7 projects or with other tools outside the current STEP 7 project e Connections using substitute objects such as SIMATIC S85 PC PQ SIMATIC PC Station or Other Station This method is described in the section above e Unspecified connections e STEP 7 object Partner in other project multiproject With this method a connection is reserved in both subprojects that can be synchronized later by the system when the partner project is included in the multiproject S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 103 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections In both projects the same connection name must be configured in the properties of the connection The connection name is used as a textual reference when the projects are merged Based on the connection name it is possible to assign the connection partner and synchronize the connection properties Before the projects are merged such connections are unspecified connections in terms of addressing in other words the partner addresses remain empty Unspecified Connections Connections to an as yet unknown device for example a diagnostic unit are configured as unspecified connections They can be specified later in the Prop
282. t connections to a specified partner for example a CPU are created in the same way as connections within a project identical procedure The dialog for selecting the connection partner has been extended and allows you not only to select the endpoint module but also the project within a multiproject to which the endpoint belongs The consistency of interproject connections is retained when you work with the projects of the multiproject e Interproject connections within a multiproject are implicitly broken when a project is taken out of the multiproject for distributed editing and the connection partner is located in the removed project e When the removed project is returned to the multiproject STEP 7 automatically merges the broken connections consistently Connections to Non S7 Stations using Substitute Objects 5 3 2 If you want to configure connections to devices or stations that are not S7 stations select a station of the type SIMATIC S5 PC PG or Other Station as the destination station By creating these stations in NetPro and networking them you have already specified the node addresses MAC or IP addresses of the two stations You must specify the TSAP Transport Service Access Point for the destination station Notice Connections to non S7 stations for example SIMATIC S5 are generated as incompletely specified connections in other words the remote TSAP or port is empty These connections mus
283. t oriented segmentation the completeness of the message is detected large amounts of data can be transmitted Transmission reliability is extremely high due to automatic repetition and additional field check mechanisms The communications partner confirms reception of data and the sender receives a return value on the SEND RECEIVE interface ISO transport is operated only on Industrial Ethernet and is optimized for high performance operation at the self contained manufacturing level 1 The previous name of the SEND RECEIVE interface was S585 connections S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 31 C79000 G8976 C182 08 1 Communication via Ethernet CPs in S7 Stations IP Internet Protocol For internetwork data transmission the following services are available with suitable CPs such as the CP 443 1 ISO on TCP connection ISO on TCP is intended for reliable internetwork data transmission The ISO on TCP service corresponds to the TCP IP standard Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol with the RFC 1006 extension according to layer 4 of the ISO reference model See 18 RFC 1006 extends the TCP protocol by allowing the transmission of blocks of data messages assuming that both partners support RFC 1006 Transmission reliability is extremely high due to automatic repetition and additional field check mechanisms The communications partner confirms reception of data and th
284. t other connection partners that are set as default when you create a new connection as described below Opening the Dialog To call the dialog for special connection properties follow the steps outlined below 1 Select the required connection in the connection table 2 Select the menu option Edit gt Object Properties Result The Properties UDP Connections dialog appears Tabs The following tabs are available for UDP connections e General Displays parameters that identify the connection e Addresses Displays the local and remote address information e Overview Overview of all configured UDP connections of the selected S7 station with corresponding parameters and the status of the connection e Status Information This tab displays the current status information for the connection valid at the time the dialog is opened This information corresponds to that displayed by NCM diagnostics S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 134 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections 5 7 1 Specifying the Local Connection Endpoint General Tab This tab of the Properties dialog displays general connection parameters that identify the local connection endpoint Properties UDP Connection UOP Verbindurng 9 Eene Figure 5 18 Layout of the General Tab in the Properties Dialog for UDP Connections S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Co
285. t timers and counters of this connection You can normally accept these default values If necessary for example with connections to non Simatic systems you can set the timers and counters individually and influence the dynamic response of the connection Properties 150 Transport Connection x Options Overview Status Information General Addresses Dynamics The following values should only be changed in special cases Connection Establishment Retransmission time a Data Transter Retransmission time 100 ris fio Mas count 5 Inactivity time s 20 Window time z 10 Cancel Help Figure 5 9 Layout of the Dynamics Tab of the Properties Dialog Attributes Description Access Connection Establishment Retransmission Time The retransmission time specifies the interval after which an unsuccessful connection establishment attempt can be triggered again 1 60 s default 5 s if connection establishment is active Modifiable if connection establishment is passive gt irrelevant Data Transfer Retransmission time This parameter specifies the interval after which an Modifiable unsuccessful transmission attempt can be triggered again 1100 30000 ms default 1000 ms S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 116 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections Attributes Description Access
286. ta record length or offset wrong 80B3x S7 300 only i Parameter error Wrong CP address 80C14 S7 300 only Temporary error The specified data record is currently being processed 80C24 S7 300 only Temporary error There is a job bottleneck the data record cannot be read yet 80C3H S7 300 only Temporary error Resources memory in use 80CC44 S7 300 only Communication error occurs temporarily and a repetition in the user program will often remedy the problem 80D0n S7 300 only Configuration error The maximum number of blocks of input and output data has been exceeded the interface DB is too large S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 230 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 0 O 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FB88 PN_InOut FB90 PN_InOut_Fast continued Table 7 10 Codes for PN_InOut FB88 and PN_InOut_Fast FB90 continued DONE ERROR STATUS Meaning 0 1 80D11 S7 300 only Configuration error Possible Causes e The interface of the configured component does not match the one used in the program outputs e The wrong module was inserted The PROFINET service is not supported 0 1 80D2H S7 300 only Configuration error Possible Causes e The interface of the configured component does not match the one used in the program inputs e The wrong module was inserted The PROFINET service is not supported e
287. ter STRUCT SUBNET MASK 0 0 Value_1 BYTE B 16 FF 1 0 Value_2 BYTE B 16 FF 2 0 Value_3 BYTE B 16 FF 3 0 Value_4 BYTE B 16 0 4 0 END_ STRUCT 8 0 END _ STRUCT 22 0 Sub_field_3 STRUCT Subfield 3 default router 0 0 Sub_field_ ID INT 8 Number of the subfield 2 0 Sub_field_len INT 8 Length of the subfield in bytes 4 0 STAT9 STRUCT 0 0 STAT10 BYTE B 16 C0 1 0 STAT11 BYTE B 16 6F 2 0 STAT12 BYTE B 16 DE 3 0 STAT13 BYTE B 16 6A 4 0 END_ STRUCT 8 0 END _ STRUCT S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 163 C79000 G8976 C182 08 6 Programmed Communication Connections 6 5 Parameter Fields for Connection Types General Below you will see which values need to be entered in the parameter fields and which subfields are used for the various connection types Some applications do not require all the subfield types refer once again to the table for details Note Please read the explanations of the configurable connection properties for the individual connection type in Chapter 5 Connection ID The ID parameter that precedes each connection parameter field beside the type ID is particularly important On programmed connections you can assign this ID freely within the permitted range of values You must then use this ID on the call interface of the FCs for the SEND RECV interface to identify the connection Range of values for the connection ID e 7 400 1 2 throu
288. tered connection name This identifies the ISO on TCP connection endpoint CPU If you display all the ISO transport connections being operated in this station in the Applications multiprocessor mode with PC stations multiple applications the CPU application that is the endpoint of the particular connection is specified here R S or via CP With S7 CPs Rack slot of the local CP via which the connection is established With PC stations Display of the CP over which the connection is maintained Partner Specifies the remote IP address of the connection address Local TSAP Local Transport Service Access Point 8 characters default Remote TSAP Remote transport service access point 8 characters default Mode Displays the mode configured in the Options tab Status Indicates the current configuration of the connection Connections without assignment are indicated by No local CP No remote CP in the status column and a P character at the end of the Local ID for example 0002 A000 Connections you are currently editing are also indicated by at the end of the local ID Connection Overview with Multiple CPUs in an S7 Station If you operate more than one CPU in your S7 station you can click the button to extend the overview to the connections on all CPUs S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 125 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connectio
289. th Alternative Procedure You can also follow the steps outlined below in the SIMATIC Manager 1 Use the menu command PLC Display Accessible Nodes to display the nodes that you can access over Industrial Ethernet 2 Select the required node in the list displayed 3 Then select the menu command PLC Ethernet Address Result The previously selected node is entered directly into the Addressing dialog You cannot modify the MAC address of the node 4 Enter the required IP parameters and assign them to the CP see above under STEP 5 Result The CP is now accessible on Industrial Ethernet using the IP address S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 80 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with 3 4 2 Addressing using the Properties Dialog in HW Config or NetPro Follow the steps below to assign the IP address the first time 1 2 Open the SIMATIC Manager Define the configuration of your S7 station with the appropriate components in HW Config in an existing or newly created project When you create the CP network it with an Industrial Ethernet subnet When you create the CP in HW Config the necessary dialog is displayed in which you can network the device and assign the IP address Select the Addressing tab in the properties dialog of the CP you want to address The tab displayed is identical to the dialogs illustrated in Section 3 4 1
290. th function block FB55 Block and Data Structure The graphic below shows the following e Structure resulting from parameter fields and subfields The connections and specific system data are is described by an identically structured parameter field Individual parameters are characterized by subfields e Offset range The CONF_DB can start at any point within a data block as specified by an offset range Configuration data block Offset range 0 n DB identifier System data for CP ID for system data 0 l o Number of subfields Subfield Subfield 2 V Subfield n CONF_DB v j Parameter field for system data CP networking and connections Individual parameters I N N N Es Subfield types are Parameter fields are described below in described below in Section 6 6 Sections 6 4 and 6 5 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 158 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 6 Programmed Communication Connections Example Below you will find a sample of a configuration data block with the parameter field for system data and a parameter field for a TCP connection Table 6 1 CONF DB STL Ex plana tion DATA_BLOCK DB271 TITLE IP_CONFIG for 1 active nTCP connection AUTHOR Alfred CP data IP 200 12 1 144 Router 200 12 1 80 FAMILY AS300 Connection data Destination IP addr 200 1
291. the information in NetPro S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs Setting Block Parameters Automatically To ensure correct parameter settings for the block calls The LAD STL FBD editor in STEP 7 provides you with the option of accepting all the relevant parameters from the hardware configuration HW Config and from the connection configuration NetPro When assigning the parameters for the block in the user program follow the steps outlined below 1 Select the block call and its block parameters 2 Right click and select the menu command Connections 3 Depending on the block type you can now select the connection and or module intended for the block from a list 4 Confirm your selection as far as possible the available parameter values are entered in the block call Response to Incorrect Addresses Notice If you inadvertently address not a CP but another module type errors occur that cannot be indicated by the error messages of the FCs themselves 7 2 2 Parameters for Specifying a CPU Data Area input parameters Specifying the Data Area on the CPU When you call an FC you transfer the address and length of the data area on the CPU in which the user data is available or will be stored or which can contain further parameter information The ANY pointer data type is used to address
292. the protocols access with FTP FTP IP protocol S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 17 C79000 G8976 C182 08 1 Communication via Ethernet CPs in S7 Stations PG OP communication PG OP communication is used to download programs and configuration data to run tests and diagnostic functions and to control and monitor a plant from OPs S7 communication S7 communication forms a simple and efficient interface between SIMATIC S7 stations and PGs PCs using communication function blocks S 5 compatible communication with SEND RECEIVE interface Depending on the CP type the SEND RECEIVE interface allows program controlled communication on a configured connection from a SIMATIC S7 PLC to another SIMATIC S7 PLC to a SIMATIC S5 PLC to PCs PGs and to any other station Depending on the CP type the following communications services are available on the SEND RECEIVE interface ISO Transport optimized for top performance at the self contained manufacturing level TCP IP for internetwork communication with ISO on TCP connections RFC 1006 TCP connections and UDP datagram service including broadcast multicast sending E mails The controller is capable of sending messages triggered by process events refer to the IT CP manual for details 5 S5 compatible communication with FETCH WRITE services server The FETCH WRITE services server allow direct access to the system memory
293. ties 150 Transport Connection x Options Overview General Addresses Local Remote MAC HEX 08 00 06 07 00 O10 TSA4P ASCII ISO 1 TSAP HE 49 53 4F 20 31 TS 4P length 5 5 Status Information Dynamics 08 00 06 01 00 01 jso 49 53 4F 2D 31 Cancel Help Figure 5 7 TSAP Format Layout of the Addresses Tab of the Properties Dialog with Default TSAPs ISO transport connections have a TSAP length of 1 to 16 bytes When you are entering values the current length is displayed automatically visible display 16 ASCII characters Local and remote TSAPs can be input as hexadecimal values or as ASCII strings If you make your entries in ASCII the characters you enter are also displayed in hexadecimal format If you make your entries in hexadecimal printable characters are displayed in ASCII 8 hexadecimal values are visible If you enter nonprintable characters the ASCII display is gray no further ASCII entries possible and the nonprintable characters are displayed as periods Local and Remote TSAPs Remote and local TSAPs can be identical since the connection is uniquely identified by the different MAC addresses If you require more than one connection between two stations the TSAPs must also be different S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 114 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections Default TSAPs When configuri
294. tion 1 e Connection reserved for send and receive jobs Bit 5 Status of current job 0 e No receive job being executed 1 e Receive job being executed Bits 6 7 Previous job 00 e No information available on previous receive job 01 e Previous receive job completed successfully 10 e Previous receive job not completed successfully RESULT1 0000 0 00 Bits 8 11 Codes for FETCH WRITE excluded values 0x3 0x7 0x8 0xB 0xF Bit 8 Connection type 0 e No FETCH connection 1 e Connection reserved for FETCH jobs Bit 9 Connection type 0 e No WRITE connection 1 e Connection reserved for WRITE jobs Bit 10 Job status FETCH WRITE 0 e Job status OK 1 e Job status NOT OK This ID is set in the following situations The job was acknowledged negatively by the CPU The job could not be forwarded to the CPU because the connection was in the LOCKED status The job was rejected because the FETCH WRITE header did not have the correct structure Bit 11 Status of FETCH WRITE job 0 e No job active e Job from LAN active S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 A 215 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC10 AG_CNTRL Continued RESULT for CMD 1 Parameter Hex value range RESULT1 0000 000 Meaning Bit valu e Bits 12 15 General CP information excluded values 0x3 0xB Bit12 Informatio
295. tion 6 Notice S7 connections via routers are supported only within a STEP 7 project but not between partners in different STEP 7 projects of a multiproject Interface in the User Program of the S7 Station You use SFBs for S7 400 and FBs for S7 300 in the user program Block Type Client Server Described in SFB FB12 BSEND Xx STEP 7 SFB FB13 BRCV 7 Documentation 8 SFB FB15 PUT xX 1 SFB FB14 GET xX 1 SFB FB8 USEND xX SFB FB9 URCV xX SFC FC62 CONTROL S7 400 xX x 2 C_CNTRL S7 300 1 you do not need to configure a connection on the server 2 for S7 300 Notice Please remember the following points regarding data consistency in your user program In the CPU of the S7 station the read or written information is taken from the S7 user program into the operating system or copied from the operating system to the S7 user program in blocks of 8 or 32 bytes depending on the firmware version If information in the word or double word format is located across such boundaries data inconsistency may arise during transmission using S7 communication For more detailed information refer to the STEP 7 documentation 8 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 29 C79000 G8976 C182 08 1 Communication via Ethernet CPs in S7 Stations Notes on S7 communication between PC PG station and S7 station Applications in a PC
296. tion partners that exchange data via UDP You will find a description of the connection specific properties dialogs in the following sections ISO transport connections see Section 5 4 ISO on TCP connections see Section 5 5 TCP connections see Section 5 6 UDP see Section 5 7 You will find further information in the following sources For the properties of the configurable connection types refer to Section 1 5 There are situations in which communication connections are not set up over the configuration interface of STEP 7 but program controlled by certain applications see also Chapter 6 For the properties of the configurable connection type E mail refer to 5 You will find information on the numbers of connections and amounts of data in Section 4 1 For information on configuring connections refer to the online help of STEP 7 by selecting Help gt Contents S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections 5 1 Procedure Initial Situation The steps described here assume the following 1 You have created the local S7 station and the required partner stations in your STEP 7 projects refer to the description in Chapter 3 2 You have clarified the other station types with which connections must be established You create substitute objects for these station types in your STEP 7 projects Setting up Connections and Using Th
297. tion Endpoint General Tab This tab of the Properties dialog displays general connection parameters that identify the local connection endpoint Properties TCP Connection p004 A021 F TCP Yerbindurig 5 Figure 5 14 Layout of the General Tab in the Properties Dialog for TCP Connections S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 127 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections ites Besson CR Local Endpoint The entry is identical to the Local ID parameter in the Selectable connection table Name When you create the connection a name is proposed here Modifiable along with a connection number as suffix With unspecified connections use this box to identify the partner Via CP If the station contains more than one CP of the same type Display only connected to the same subnet you can select the connection route gt Route see Section 5 9 If no CP is assigned for example because the CP has been deleted none is displayed here Active Connection With this option you specify whether the connection is Modifiable Establishment established by this S7 station This is the default setting when the address of the partner is specified If you selected partner unspecified when you created the connection the option is deselected as default If you activate the option you must also specify the address of the partner in the Addresses
298. tion that can be expected maximum 1432 bytes see LEN parameter 1 Reference Manual STEP 7 System and Standard Functions for S7 300 and S7 400 receiving an alarm with SFB54 RALRM Condition Codes The following table shows the condition codes formed by the DONE NEW ERROR and STATUS parameters that must be evaluated by the user program A 254 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs Note For entries with the coding 8Fxx note the information under STATUS in the Reference Manual STEP 7 System and Standard Functions for S7 300 and S7 400 The chapter describing error evaluation with the RET VAL output parameter contains detailed information Table 7 14 Condition Codes PNIO ALARM DONE O oa oO oO OF O O O O GO O O O O O NEW ERROR STATUS at Meaning Data transfer active 00004 Alarm data successfully transferred and alarm acknowledged O _ 0000 No alarm data exist O 81834 No PNIO controller configuration wrong CPLADDR or CP in STOP mode 81841 System error or illegal parameter type Destination buffer TINFO or AINFO is too short Area length error reading a parameter e g DB too short Area length error writing a parameter e g DB too short Area error reading a parameter Ar
299. tions in the two networks are managed in the same project the networking appears as shown below in NetPro View in a STEP 7 Project Pe NETPRO Hetz konfigurieren Netz zu Projekt G YGDESKTOP ncm icabiS 7 Proj Handbuchikap1_6 6 a Hetz Bearbeiten Einfugen elsystem Ansicht Extras Fenster Hilfe elma e E x Ethernet 13 Industrial Ethernet MPI Metzr1 MPI La g SIMATIC 400 Stat 23 i m SIMATIC 400 Station 2 CPUICP 414 45 oO 0 SIMATIC 3001 T CPUJCP ai 313 343 Oo oO mi L SIMATIC 400 Stated E Etherneti Industrial Ethernet S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 45 C79000 G8976 C182 08 2 Characteristics of the Ethernet CPs 2 1 Communications Processors for S7 300 The modules are designed to match the components of the S7 300 C7 300 programmable logic controller and have the following features LED displays Compact modules single or double width for simple installation on the S7 standard rail Can be used in central or expansion racks The operator controls and displays are all located on the front panel No fan necessary Direct backplane bus connection via the supplied bus connector Wide design 8 pin RJ 45 female connector for connecting the CP to twisted pair Ethernet Narrow design 2 x 8 pin RJ 45 jacks as 2 port switch for connecting the CP to twisted pair Ethernet The project engineering of the
300. tly on the Internet at http support automation siemens com WW view en 574211 Entry ID 574211 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 174 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs 7 1 General Notes on FCs FBs Block Library The functions FCs and function blocks FBs described here are supplied with the STEP 7 basic package unless indicated otherwise The following list shows the numbers of the FCs as they are supplied with the configuration tool You can change these numbers Under SIMATIC_NET_ CP you can also see which folders contain blocks after installing the NCM S7 for Industrial Ethernet option default setting in STEP 7 Setup Please note that you must use different FCs for the S7 300 and S7 400 separate libraries Communicatio Block Type SIMATIC Manager Library Described in N Service SIMATIC_NET_CP Functional Area CP 300 CP 400 SEND RECEIVE FC5 AG_SEND x xX Section 7 3 S5 compatible FC6 AG_RECV x x Section 7 3 communication FC50 AG_LSEND x 2 X Section 7 3 FC60 AG_LRECV x 2 x Section 7 3 FC53 AG_SSEND x 3 Section 7 3 FC63 AG_SRECV x 3 Section 7 3 SEND RECEIVE FC7 AG_LOCK xX X section 7 4 S5 compatible FC8 AG_ UNLOCK x x Section 7 4 communication FC10 AG CNTRL x x 3 Section 7 5 Programmed FB55 IP_ CONFIG xX X Section 7 6 communication connections S
301. trial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 136 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connections 5 7 2 Specifying UDP Addresses Address Parameters and Connection Types With UDP the communication partners are addressed using the local and remote endpoint as follows e Local addresses Local IP address and local port e Remote addresses Remote IP address and remote port Note The term connection is also used here for UDP Reason During configuration just as in TCP the communication partners are assigned to each other and therefore logically connected In actual fact with UDP there is no explicit connection establishment between communication partners Ethernet station A 7 Ethernet station B remote m UDP Te a g oort MAC address A Figure 5 19 Sending and Receiving on One UDP Connection Depending on the required connection type the remote address parameters are either specified or left open during configuration e Specified UDP connection You specified a destination station when you created the connection Configuring broadcast or multicast provides you with a further option see Section 5 7 3 below e Unspecified UDP connection You entered unspecified for the connection partner when you created the connection S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 137 C79000 G8976 C182 08
302. ual for the S7 CP you are using You will find an overview of the versions of the FCs FBs in the documentation and block history Application The following diagram illustrates the use of the FCs described here for bi directional data transfer on one configured connection S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 A 181 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs CPU Ethernet CP Ethernet CP CPU STEP 7 user program STEP 7 user progra User data areas User data areas AG_SEND send L receive 3 gt AG RECV i Connection AG_RECV g receive lt J lt 1 send lt amp AG_SEND I O Note Unless specifically stated otherwise the information on this and the following pages refers to AG_SEND AG_LSEND AG_SSEND or AG_RECV AG_LRECV AG_SRECV Sample Programs Please note that the following sample programs are also available on the Internet e Sample program for the Send Receive interface with the blocks FC5 AG_SEND and FC6 AG_RECV for S7 300 http support automation siemens com WW view en 17853532 e Sample program for the Send Receive interface with the blocks FC50 AG_LSEND and FC60 AG_LRECV for S7 400 http support automation siemens com WW view en 18513371 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 182 Release 09 2007 C7900
303. ur PG or engineering station is configured for this mode you must specify the interface on the PG or engineering station explicitly with Set PG PC Interface Follow the steps outlined below 1 Open the Set PG PC Interface dialog box in the Windows Control Panel 2 Set the PG PC interface according to the CPs available on your PG and according to the bus attachment interface parameter assignment used For more detailed information on the topic of PG operation and engineering station refer to 4 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 25 C79000 G8976 C182 08 1 Communication via Ethernet CPs in S7 Stations 1 3 2 OP Operation Connecting Operator Interface Devices via Industrial Ethernet Requirements Procedure v A 26 Operation allowing operator interface functions is possible when the following conditions are met e The following are installed in the operator control and monitoring device an Ethernet CP SOFTNET S7 for Ind Ethernet or software from the SIMATIC NET CD e The CPs in the S7 stations are supplied with a MAC IP address use the default MAC address or set an IP address To be able to use S7 communication address the required module in the SIMATIC S7 PLC on your operator interface system For more detailed information please refer to the description of your operator control and monitoring devices and in 4 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet
304. us Information l Local Operating mode Fetch passive Cancel Help Figure 5 25 Configuring FETCH PASSIVE Based on the Example of an ISO Transport Connection The connection can then only be used for this mode sending or receiving with the FCs AG_SEND AG_LSEND or AG_RECV AG_LRECV is then no longer possible The connection is established passively in other words only the partner station SIMATIC S5 station a PC station or a non SIMATIC station can establish the connection The setting is made automatically in the General tab and cannot be changed Notice Remember that with this configuration on an S7 300 one connection resource free connection for S7 functions of the S7 300 CPU is used CPU connection resources are also used for example by S7 300 CPs in the FMS mode or by PGs and OPs For more detailed information about the maximum connection resources refer to 1 e SIMATIC PC Station FETCH ACTIVE WRITE ACTIVE If you select the FETCH ACTIVE or WRITE ACTIVE mode for the ISO transport connection you can access the system areas on a SIMATIC S7 PLC or a SIMATIC S5 station from the PC station The connection establishment is active in other words the partner station must wait for connection establishment passive connection establishment on the partner S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 150 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 5 Configuring Communication Connectio
305. ustrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning A 208 Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs 7 5 FC10AG _CNTRL How It Works With the AG_CNTRL function you can diagnose connections When necessary you can initialize connection establishment again using the FC The following actions are possible by setting commands e Reading out connection information Based on status information you can decide whether or not it would be useful to reset all or individual connections of the CP e Resetting configured connections You can reset individual or all connections of a CP The commands of the AG_CNTRL function FC are permitted only for SEND RECV connections based on the ISO RFC TCP UDP protocols Call Interface Call interface in FBD representation AG_CNTRL DONE ERROR STATUS RESULT 1 RESULT2 Example in STL representation STL Explanation call fc 10 AG_CNTRL block call ACT M1 0 Job triggered by memory bit ID MW8 Connection ID acc to configuration LADDR w 16 100 LADDR 256 dec in hardware configuration CMD MW6 Command ID DONE M20 1 Execution code ERROR M20 2 Exrror code STATUS MW22 Status code RESULT1 MD24 Job result 1 RESULT2 MD28 Job result 2 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 209 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7
306. utput parameter contains detailed information To find out which SFCs are used and are relevant for error evaluation display the properties dialog of the FC described here in the Calls tab Table 7 3 Condition Codes for AG_RECV AG LRECV AG _SRECV NDR ERROR STATUS Meaning EE 0 o 8180 No data available yet not with AG_SRECV 0 e The configuration is missing e The ISO transport service has not yet started on the Ethernet CP e The connection is not established 0 1 81844 e llegal type specified for the RECV parameter e System error O 81854 Destination buffer RECV is too short S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 A 199 C79000 G8976 C182 08 7 Programming FCs Functions and FBs for S7 Ethernet CPs FC6 AG_RECV FC60 AG_LRECV FC63 AG_SRECV continued Table 7 3 Condition Codes for AG_RECV AG_LRECV AG_SRECV ERROR STATUS Meaning 8186 ID DN invalid ID 1 2 64 S7 400 0 N The connection is not established The send job should only be attempted again after waiting for at least 100 ms 0 re Source area invalid for example Area does not exist in the DB 0 1 BF25H 8F254 Area error writing a parameter 0 a 8F29 Alignment error writing a parameter 0 1 8F30 Parameter is in the write protected first current data block 0 ee Parameter is in the write protected second current data block 0 8F32H Parameter contains a DB number that i
307. vices How to create the conditions for your communications requirements You will find further information in the following sources When installing the Ethernet CP please refer to the instructions in the manual 2 supplied with the Ethernet CP This also contains further information about the performance of the Ethernet CP For the functions and use of the STEP 7 configuration software some of which is used to configure the CP such as hardware configuration please refer to 6 For using structuring and handling Industrial Ethernet you will find detailed information in 10 For a general introduction to local area networks with TCP IP refer to 12 and 13 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 1 Communication via Ethernet CPs in S7 Stations 1 1 Industrial Ethernet Definition Within the open heterogeneous SIMATIC NET communication system Industrial Ethernet is the network for the management and cell level Physically Industrial Ethernet is an electrical network that uses a shielded coaxial cable or twisted pair or an optical network with fiber optic cables Industrial Ethernet is defined by the international standard IEEE 802 3 see 10 All Round Communication in the Industrial Sector Industrial Ethernet is integrated in the SIMATIC NET concept that allows comprehensive networking of the management cell and field levels in conjunction with P
308. wnload to the Ethernet CPs Router Ethernet P for example SDN Router for example ISDN l I s TS adapter Ethernet CP Configuration for PG OP Operation Local and Remote S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 1 Communication via Ethernet CPs in S7 Stations 1 3 1 PG Communication with STEP 7 over Industrial Ethernet Requirements for PG Communication PG communication is possible when the following requirements are met e An Ethernet CP is installed in the PG or engineering station or there is a modem ISDN interface for remote access e The Ethernet CP must have an address default MAC address or set the IP address Networking the PG Engineering Station Depending on the configuration of the PG or Engineering Station the following two situations are possible when using PG communication e PG Engineering Station in the Configured Mode If you select this configuration when you commission the PG engineering station the interfaces of the communication modules you are using are already known The option in Set PG PC Interface is automatically set to PC internal Once you have downloaded this configuration to your PG engineering station you can exchange PG functions with the accessible nodes in the network with STEP 7 without requiring any further settings e PG Engineering Station in PG Operation If yo
309. y in a multiproject Note Instead of creating substitute objects you can also configure unspecified connections for connections to the stations listed above In the Properties dialog of these connections you must then specify the full partner address These partners do not appear in the NetPro plant view Plant Plant Production 1 Production 2 T 400 1 S7 400 2 PC PG Ti 400 4 iii wi i pe j Third party uit i device i Ethernet subnet 1 A 74 p Hal Ht il S7 400 3 aoe S7 87 4005 SIMATIC S5 S7 CPs for Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning Release 09 2007 C79000 G8976 C182 08 3 Operating the Ethernet CP with Procedure To enter a substitute object in the project following the steps below 1 Select the project in the SIMATIC Manager 2 Select Insert gt Station gt and then as necessary Other Station PG PC or SIMATIC S5 Possible result the selected object is created in the project KE SIMATIC Manager PROJECT ETHERNE lt Standard Hierarchy Of SEES Sh File Edit Inset PLC View Options Window Help a x olele 5 e n Pn 2a E E Ea PROJECT ETHERNET a g SIMATIC 400 Station 1 H H SIMATIC 400 Station 2 i SIMATIC 400 Station 3 SIMATIC SIMATIC SIMATIC 400 Station 1 400 Station 2 400 Station 3 EE 3 5 Hill ma MP Metz 1 Ethernet 1 SIMATIC S5f1 Press F1

Display - Service, Support

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents